Skip to main content

Full text of "The Automobile Hand-book: A Work of Practical Information for the Use of Owners, Operators and ..."

See other formats


Google 



This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project 

to make the world's books discoverable online. 

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject 

to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books 

are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover. 

Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the 

publisher to a library and finally to you. 

Usage guidelines 

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the 
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to 
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying. 
We also ask that you: 

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for 
personal, non-commercial purposes. 

+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine 
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the 
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help. 

+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find 
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it. 

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just 
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other 
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of 
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner 
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe. 

About Google Book Search 

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers 
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web 

at |http: //books .google .com/I 



c,VTYO^ 







/tu.x^.u>c^ (I "SZ^^-tU^ 






^W^ci^ 



nuci 



1Ji& AutomoDile 
HAND-B OOK 




WORK O" PR. 
CAL JNtORMA 
FOR THE USE 




^^^^ Operators ^^^ 
Automobile MecKanics 



RQAU TROUBLES 
MOTOR TROUBLES 
CARBURETER TROUBLES 
IGNITION TROUBLES 
CLUTCH TROUBLES 
STARTING TROUBLES 



By L. ELLIOTT BROOKES 




=M 



FREDERICK J. DRAKE ^ CO. 
PUBLISHERS CHICAGO 



JransportatioQ 
Wbrar^ 



COPYRIGHT, 1905 

BY 

FREDERICK J. DRAKE & COMPANY 

CHICAGO, U. S. A. 



// , - .' - - 



The Automobile Hand-book 



Accumulators — See Storage Batteries. 

Acetylene. A number of inconveniences are 
attached to the use of acetylene. The problem 
of properly purifying it has yet to be solved. 
Metallic compounds of sulphur, phosphorus and 
nitrogen and free carbon are contained in the 
carbide, and the gas has in it many impurities 
which endanger health when burned in closed 
rooms. The free carbon in the carbide gets into 
the burners in the form of fine dust and obstructs 
them. A great annoyance is smoking of the 
lamps, which takes place after two or three 
hours burning. This is due to decomposition of 
the acetylene by the heated burner, by which 
carbon is deposited in the narrow opening. Many 
of the so-called spontaneous explosions of this gas 
have without doubt been caused by high tempera- 
ture in the generator — see also Gas Lamps. 

Acid Solutions. The electrolyte, or solution 
used in storage battery cells, is made by pouring 
sulphuric acid into distilled water until the 
specific gravity becomes 1.12. The solution 
becomes extremely warm and should not be used 
until its temperature is about 60 degrees, 



8 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

A good soldering solution is made by neutraliz- 
ing hydrochloric acid with zinc until it is no 
longer strongly acid. 

Admission-pipes, Diameter of. The internal 

diameter of the admission or inlet-pipe leading 
from the carbureter to the admission-valve cham- 
ber should not exceed one-fourth the diameter 
of the motor cylinder. 

This limitation is necessaiy in order to produce 
as great a partial vacuum as is possible in the 
admission-pipe. The carbureter should be placed 
as close as possible to the admission-valve 
chamber of the motor in order to secure the best 




results. Short turns or bends in the admission- 
pipe greatly increase the air-friction in the pipe 
and at high speeds greatly diminish the volume 
of the charge drawn into the cylinder by the 
' iductive or suction action of the motor-piston. 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



9 



An admission-pipe with a side inlet and short 
bends, for a two-eyhnder motor, is shown in 
Figure 1. Such forms of construction should be 
avoided whenever possible. Figure 2 shows an 
admission-pipe of approved design, with long 




bends, for a two-cylinder motor. The radius of 
curvature of the pipe on its center line should not 
be less than twice the outside diameter of the 
pipe. If space allows, a radius of three times the 
outside diameter of the pipe will give better results 
than two diameters. 

Admission-port — See Motor, Two-cycle. 

Admission-valves, Diameter and Lift of. 

For a motor of any desired bore and stroke and 
speed in revolutions per minute, the following 
formula may be used to determine the diameter 
of the valve opening: 



10 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

Let B be the bore of the motor cyh'nder in 
inches, and S the stroke of the piston also in 
inches. As R is the number of revolutions per 
minute and D the required diameter of the valve 
opening, then 

BXSXR 



D= 



15,000 



Example: Required the diameter of the 
admission-valve opening for a motor of 4|-inch 
bore and stroke at 1,000 revolutions per 
minute. 

Answer: As 4^ multiplied by 4| and by 1,000 
equals 20,250, then 20,250 divided by 15,000 
gives 1.35 inches as the diameter of the valve 
opening. 

In practice, a motor of 4 J inches bore and 
stroke has with a mechanically operated 
admission-valve an opening of Ij inches diam- 
eter and runs up to 1,200 revolutions per 
minute. 

The upper view in Figure 3 shows clearly the 
diameter D referred to in the formula, as some 
persons are in the habit of referring to the outside 
diameter of the valve itself instead of the open- 
ing in the admission-valve seat. The center 
view in Figure 3 shows an admission- valve with 
a flat seat, which is known as a mushroom valve, 
on account of its shape. For this form of valve 
to give a full opening the lift should be exactly 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



11 



one-fourth of the diameter of the valve opening : 
therefore if L be the required lift of the valve, 
and D the diameter 
of the valve opening, 
then 



L=- = 0.25 D 
4 

The lower view in 
Figure 3 shows a valve 
with a bevel seat, hav- 
ing an angle of 45 
degrees, which is most 
commonly used. The 
lift of this form of 
valve requires to be 
about three-eighths of 

the diameter of the valve opening: that is, if L is 
the required lift of the valve and D the diameter 
of the valve opening, then 




L= 



D 



2.83 



= 0.35 D 



The bevel-seat form of valve is to be preferred 
to the flat-seat or mushroom type of valve, for 
two reasons: first, that it is more readily kept in 
shape by regrinding, and second, it gives a freer 
find more direct passage for the gases, as will be 
])]ainly seen by reference to the lower view in 
Figure 3. 



12 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

Table No. 1 gives the correct diameter of valve 
openings for motors from 3 by 3 to 6 by 6 inches 
bore and stroke, with speeds from 900 to 1,800 
revolutions per minute, and piston velocities of 
600, 750 and 900 feet per minute, for mechanically 
operated ad mission- valves. 

Table No. 1. 



& 


s 


Plstou Speail In Feet per Minute. 


000 


750 


^ 1 


h 


,4 


?5 


,.i 


h 


^.1 


^ 


ki 


m 


M 


s3o» 


l§ 


ih 








0,72 


1500 


0-90 


ISOO 


1.08 


^ 


(H 


1030 


0.84 


12S5 


1.05 


1570 


1,26 






900 


0.96 


1125 


1.20 


1350 


1.44 


'H 


^jf 


800 


i.oa 


1000 


1.35 


1200 


1.62 






720 


1.20 


900 


1.50 


1080 


1.80 










S20 


1.65 


965 


1.96 





6 


600 


1.44 


750 


1.80 


s«m 


2.16 



Atmospheric or suction operated admission- 
valves require to be of .somewhat larger diameter 
than mechanically operated ad mission- valves, 
for two reasons: fir.st, that the incoming chaise 
has to Hft the valve from its seat and keep it 
suspended during the suction stroke of the motor 
piston, and secondly on account of the resistance 
offered by the valve spring, which tends at all 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



13 



times to keep the valve on its seat. For an 
atmospherically operated ad miss ion -valve which 
will insure practically a full charge in tlie motor 
cylinder the formula should be 
BXSXR 
12,750 

The proper diameter for atmospherically 
operated ad miss ion- valve openings may be readily 
found by increas- 
ing the required 
diameter given in 
the above table 
for mechanically 
operated admis- 
sion-valves, by 15 
per cent. 

Example i What 
should be the cor- 
rect diameter for 
the atmospheric- 
ally operated ad- 
mission-valve of a motor of 4j inches bore and 
stroke, with a piston velocity of 750 feet per minute ? 

Answer: Under the column headed 750 and 
opposite 4^ by 4i, the diameter given is 1.35. 
Then 15 per cent of 1.35 equals 0.80, which, 
added to 1.35, gives 1.55 inches as the correct 
diameter for the valve opening under the con- 
ditions given — see also Valves. 




f 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



Admission-valves, Forms of. Figures 4 and 
5 are two fonns of combined admission-valve 
and valve cage or 
chamber. Figure 
4 has the inlet on 
top and Figure 5 
on the side. Fig- 
ures 6 and 7 show 
two forms of de- 
tachable or remov- 
able admission- 
valves. The one 
shown in Figure 7 
may be removed 
from the motor 




ADMISSION VALVE 



wilhout disconnecting the admission-pipe, 

screws into the combustion chamber and has 

ings around the 

lower portion for 

the admission of the 

explosive charge to 

the valve. 

Air. Air consists, 
by weight, of oxy- 
gen 77 parts and 
nitrogen 23 parts; 
by volume, of 21 
parts oxygen and 79 parts nitrogen. One pound 
of air occupies 13.8 cubic feet of space. One 
cubic foot of air weiglu* 1 \ ounces. 




ADMISSION VALVE 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



Air-cooled Motors— See Gasoline Motor 
Construction. 

Air, Properties of Compressed. The 
accompanying table, which may be of use to 
designers or builders of gas or gasoline motors, 
gives the Mean pressure. Temperature in degrees 
Fahrenheit, Gauge pressure, Absolute pressure 
and the Isothermal or heat-pressure of air under 
compression of from 
1 to 6.10 atmos- 
pheres. 

As energy in the 
form of power must 
be used to compress 
air to any desired 
pressure, so is ener- 
gy in the form of 
latent or stored heat 
given up by the air 
during the operation 
of compression. 
This heat consequently increases the pressure 
resulting from the compression, but not directly 
in proportion to the degree of compression in 
atmospheres. 

This increase of pressure above the Adiabatic 
or calculated pressure is known as the Isothermal 
or heat-pressure. As the values of this pressure 
cannot be calculated by the use of ordinary 
mathematics, but involve the use of logarithms, 




16 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



Table No. 2 gives these values for each degree of 
compression given. 

Table No. 2. 
Properties of Compressed Air. 



Ck)mp. in 


■ciVff^An 


Temp. In 


♦Gauge 


* A hiQol 11 1^ 


♦Isother- 


Atmos- 
pheres. 


Pressure. 


Degrees 
Fah. 


Pres- 
sure. 


Pressui'e. 


mal Pres- 
sure. 


1 





60 





14.7 




1.68 


7.62 


145 


10 


24.7 


30.39 


2.02 


10.33 


178 


15 


29.7 


39.34 


2.36 


12.62 


207 


20 


34.7 


48.91 


2.70 


14.59 


234 


25 


39.7 


59.05 


3.04 


16.34 


252 


30 


44.7 


69.72 


3.38 


17.92 


281 


35 


49.7 


80.87 


3.72 


19.32 


302 


40 


54.7 


92.49 


4.06 


20.57 


324 


45 


59.7 


104 . 53 


4.40 


21.69 


339 


50 


64.7 


116.99 


4.74 


22.76 


357 


55 


69.7 


129.84 


5.08 


23.78 


375 


60 


74.7 


143.05 


5.42 


24.75 


389 


65 


79.7 


156.64 


5.76 


25.67 


405 


70 


84.7 


170.58 


6.10 


26.55 


420 


75 


89.7 


184.83 


♦Inpou 


nds per squ 


are inch. 









Many persons who are not familiar with the 
properties of gases, estimate the pressure resulting 
from the compression to a given number of atmos- 
pheres, as the number of atmospheres multiplied 
by the atmospheric pressure, which at sea level 
is taken as 14.7 pounds per square inch. 

This assumption is erroneous and will often 
lead to grievous mistakes in motor design, 
generally giving too much compression, which 
results in premature ignition, commonly known 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 17 

as backfiring. Such methods of calculation 
would be true if the air, after compression, was 
stored in a reservoir and allowed to cool, but 
under no other conditions. 

As the Isothermal pressures given in the table 
are in absolute terms, to reduce them to gauge 
pressure terms, 14.7 pounds must be deducted to 
give the corresponding gauge pressure. 

Air Resistance, Horsepower Required to 

Overcome. The power required to move a 
plane surface, such as the vertical projection of 
an automobUe, against the air, does not become 
of much importance until the car attains a speed 
of 10 to 12 miles per hour, when it becomes an 
important factor. 

The horsepower required to propel an auto- 
mobile against the resistance of the air may be 
approximately calculated by the follov/ing formula. 
Let V be the velocity of the car in feet per second, 
and A the projected area of the front of the car 
in square feet — this maybe assumed as the height 
from the frame to the top of the body multiplied 
by the width of the seat at the floor line of the 
car — let H.P. be the horsepower required to over- 
come the air resistance, then 

VXA 
H.P.= 



240,000 



To simplify the use of the above formula. 
Table No. 3 gives speeds in miles per hour cor- 



18 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



responding to their respective velocities in fed 
per second and also cubes of velocities in fed 
per second. 

Table No. 3. 

Cubes of Velocities in Feet per Second. 



Miles i)er 

Hour 

of Car. 


Feet per 
Secoud. 


Cube of 

Velocity 

In Feet per 

Second. 


Miles per 

Hour of 

Car. 


Feet 

per 

Second. 


Cube of 

Velocity 

In Feet per 

Second. 


10.2 
13.6 
17.2 
20.4 
27.2 


15 
20 
25 
30 
40 


3,375 

8,000 

15,625 

27,000 

64,000 


34.0 
40.9 
47.7 
54.4 
61.3 


50 
60 
70 
80 
90 


125,000 
216,000 
343,000 
512,000 
729,000 



To ascertain approximately the horsepower thai 
will be necessary to drive a car against a wind d 
known velocity, the speed of the car must be 
added to that of the wind, and the required 
horsepower may be found either by use of th( 
formula given or by reference to Table No. 4 
which gives the horsepower per square foot o: 
projected surface required to propel a car agains 
the resistance of the air, with varying speeds 
in miles per hour or velocities in feet pei 
minute. 

The horsepower given by the formula anc 
Table No. 4 simply refers to the additiona 

power necessary to overcome air resistance anc 

not to the actual power required to propel s 
car at a given speed; this is entirely anothei 
matter. 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



19 



i Table No. 4. 

i Horsepower Required per Square Foot op Sur- 
face, TO Move a Car Against Air Resistance. 







Horse- 






Horse- 


Miles per 


Feet per 


power per 


Miles per 


Feet per 


I)ower per 


Hour 


Square 


Hour of 


Square 


of Car. 


Second. 


Foot of 
Surf nee. 


Car. 


Secoud. 


Foot of 
Surface. 


10 


14.7 


0.U13 


40 


58.7 


0.84 


15 


22.0 


0.44 


50 


73.3 


1.64 


20 


24.6 


0.105 


60 


87.9 


2.83 


25 


36.7 


0.205 


80 


117.3 


6.72 


30 


44.0 


0354 


100 


146.6 


13.12 



Tubes -See Tires. 

Alcohol, Properties of. A carbureter designed 
to operate with alcohol can always be used with 
gasoline, but the reverse conditions are not true, 
that is, a gasoline carbureter will not operate 
successfully with alcohol, except in some rare 
instances. Alcohol evaporates slower than gaso- 
line and its time of combustion is much slower, 
but it maintains its mean effective explosion 
pressure far better than gasoline. 

Explosive motors fitted with alcohol carbureters 
make far less noise than when using gasoline as 
a fuel, due to the slower burning of the explosive 
charge, they also make less smoke and smell. 

The jet or spray of a float-feed carbureter will 
have to pass nearly 40 per cent more liquid fuel 
than when using gasoline, consequently the open- 
ing in the nozzle must be proportionally larger. 

A carbureter using alcohol must be fitted with 
some form of device to heat the alcohol to 
ensure rapid evaporation — this is usually done 



20 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

by surrounding the mixing-chamber with an 
exhaust-heated jacket. 

The same quantity of alcohol will only take a 
car two-thirds of the distance that gasoline will, 
hence greater storage capacity woulil be needed 
on a car using alcohol as a fuel. 

An explosive motor designed to use alcohol 
requires a greater degree of compression than a 
motor of the same bore and stroke designed to 
use gasoline, in order to develop the same power. 

Alloys, Composition of. The proper com- 
position of alloys of metals for the bearings and 
other parts of an automobile is a very important 
consideration from a constructive standpoint. 
Table No. 5 gives the composition of various 
alloys of metals and also solders for different uses. 
Table No. 5. 
Composition or AlliOys. 



i 6 



nze, for Motor bearings. . 

Bronze, for Axle beariuga . . 

Brass, tor light work, other 
tljan beariwgB , 

Bronze flanges, U) stand braz- 
ing 

Genuine Babbitt metal . . 

Bronze, for bushings 

Met:il to e.Ypaad in cooling, for 
patterns 

Genuine bronze 

Solder, tor tin 

Spelter, hard 

Spelter, soft 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 21 

Alternating Current, Use of. It is not only 

useless but absolutely injurious to attempt to 
charge a storage battery directly from an alter- 
nating current circuit. This can only be done 
by means of a rotary converter, which is in reality 
a motor-generator, receiving its power from the 
alternating current and transforming it into a 
direct current which can be used to charge the 
batteries. 

Aluminoid, Composition and Use of. Alu- 

minoid is composed by weight of 60 parts 
aluminum, 30 parts tin and 10 parts zinc. It 
has a tensile strength of about 18,000 pounds and 
is a very suitable material for crank chambers, 
gear cases and small brackets, being light, 
extremely ductile and readily machined. 

Aluminum Solder. The following formula is 
for a solder which will work equally well with 
aluminum or aluminoid: Tin, 10 parts — 
cadmium, 10 parts — zinc, 10 parts — lead, 1 part. 
The pieces to be soldered must be thoroughly 
cleansed and then put in a bath of a strong 
solution of hyposulphate of soda for about two 
hours before soldering. 

Ammeter, Construction of. Ammeters for 

automobile use are constructed on the principle 
of the D'Arsonval galvanometer with a permanent 
magnetic field. The special feature is a small 
oscillating coil mounted on cone-point bearings 
surrounding a stationary armature which is 



22 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



centrally located between the pole-pieces of a 
permanent magnet,- with a pointer or index-finger 
which indicates the electrical variations on a 
graduated scale. 

The construction of an ammeter is fully shown 
in the two views in Figure 8, The permanent 
magnets used in its construction are of a special 




quality of hardened steel, made only for this 
purpose and possessed of great magnetic per- 
meability. The pole-pieces, which are of soft 
steel and well annealed, are attached to the inside 
of the lower part of the magnet legs, the joints 
between the pole-pieces and the magnet legs are 
usually ground to insure the full efficiency of the 
magnetic circuit. The soft iron core of the coil 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 23 

is for the purpose of rendering uniform the 
magnetic field in which the coil has to oscillate. 
A coil of insulated wire is wrapped upon the 
i-tationary armature at right angles to its axis, 
that is to say, in the same manner that thread is 
wound upon a spool, which is short-circuited on 
itself, that is to say, the ends of the wire fonning 
the coil are fastened together. This coil of wire 
is for the purpose of choking the magnetism 
induced in the stationary armature by the oscillat- 
ing coil, as it generates what are known as eddy 
currents within itself, thus making the instru- 
ment periodic, or dead-beat, in its indications. 
Around the armature core and outside the short- 
circuited coil of wire is wound the active or oscil- 
lating coil and at right angles to the direction of 
the winding of the first coil. The oscillating coil 
consists of a number of turns of fine insulated 
copper wire, to which the current is conveyed 
through the medium of the controlling springs at 
each end of the spindle, which is in two parts 
and connected together by a suitable sleeve of 
insulating material, as shown. 

The pointer or index-finger is made with a 
boss or hub to go over the end of the spindle of 
the active coil and also has an extension with a 
small counterweight or balance, so that the 
pointer may be accurately adjusted. 

The only difference in the construction of a 
. voltmeter and an ammeter is that in the former 



24 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



the active or oscillating coil is in series with a 
high resistance, while in the latter it is connected 
across the terminals of a shunt-block. The 
voltmeter is in reality an ammeter, the resistance 
serving to keep the amperage in step with the 
voltage. 

Reference to the three views, marked respect - 
ively A, B and C in Figure 9, will show clearly 
the principle of the operation of an ammeter or 




voltmeter and the reason that they record the 
current strength or pressure of an electric 
current accurately. 

Ammeters are of two kinds, the double-beat 
type, as shown in Figure 8, which indicates the 
current strength or number of amperes flowing in 
the electric circuit, without any regard to the 
polarity of the terminals of the circuit, by the 
pointer or index-finger moving either to the right 
or to the left of the zero position. The single- 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



25 



beat type of ammeter only records in one direc- 
tion, by the pointer moving from the left to the 
right of the graduated scale of the instrument, 
consequently the polarity of the terminals of this 
type of ammeter are marked on its outer casing 
and the polarity of the terminals of the electric 
circuit must consequently be determined before 
connecting them with the ammeter. 



VOLTS 




^ 



AMPERES 



I 



VOLT- AM METER 



Fig. 10 



A volt-ammeter, such as is commonly used on 
electric automobiles, is shown in Figure 10. 
This instrument is simply a voltmeter and a 
double-beat ammeter mounted on a single base 
and enclosed in a common case, with their 
graduated scales adjoining each other. 

Ampere — See Electrical Rules and Formulas. 

Ampere-hour, Definition of. The term 
ampere-hour is used to denote the capacity of a 



26 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

storage or a closed -circuit primary battery for cur- 
rent. A storage battery that will keep a 2 ampere 
lamp burning for 8 hours is said to have a 16 
ampere-hour capacity. In a similar manner an 80 
ampere-hour battery would operate the same lamp 
40 hours. The voltage of a battery does not en- 
ter into the calculation of its ampere-hour capac- 
ity- 
Angle Iron — See Structural Shapes. 

Animal Power, Capacity of. A man can 

exert a pull of 30 pounds, for 10 hours a day, 
with a speed of 1.70 miles per hour. 

A man carrying a load a short distance and 
returning unloaded, can carry 135 pounds 6 miles 
in a day. He can also carry 120 pounds 8 miles 
in a day — or push in a wheelbarrow 150 pounds 
10 miles as a day's work. 

A man can walk on a smooth, level road for 
8i hours at the rate of 3.67 miles per hour. 

A horse can travel 400 yards : at a walk, in 4^ 
minutes — at a trot, in 2 minutes — at a gallop, in 
1 minute. 

A work-horse, on a good road, can pull 1,600 
pounds 23 miles in a day, weight of vehicle 
included. 

A good horse, in the best of condition, can only 
exert his full capacity, or one horsepower, for 6 
hours per day. 

The work of one horse is approximately equal 
to th^t of five men. 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 27 

Anti-freezing Solutions. To prevent the 

water in the jacket of a gasoline motor from 
freezing during cold weather, calcium-chloride 
or glycerine may be used. The calcium-chloride 
should be dissolved in hot water in the proportion 
of 4 pounds of calcium-chloride to 1 gallon of 
water. Allow the solution to stand until fully 
settled, then carefully draw off the liquid without 
disturbing the sediment. 

Glycerine in the proportion of 2 pints to 3 pints 
of water may also be used for the same purpose, 
but is much more expensive than the calcium- 
chloride. 

Neither of these solutions will stand a twenty 
degree below zero temperature. 

Areas and Circumferences of Circles — See 

Table No. 6. 

Armatures, Slotted and Shuttle Types of. 

An armature is the rotating part of a dynamo or 
electric motor which generates electricity or 
develops power. 

The armature shown in Figure 11 is known as 
the Siemen's H or shuttle type and is the simplest 
form of wire-wound armature known. The 
current given by this form of armature is of the 
alternating type and is converted into a direct- 
current, when desired, by means of a two-part 
commutator on the armature shaft. 

The slotted type of armature shown in Figure 
12 has a more intricate system of winding than 



28 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



Table No. 6. 

Areas and Circumferences of Circles from 0.05 to 
10.0, Advancing by ^^o of one inch. 



Diam. 


Area 


Circum. 


Diam. 


Area 


Circum . 


.05 


.0019 


.16 


2.05 


3.30 


6.44 


.10 


.0078 


.31 


2.10 


3.46 


6.59 


.15 


.017 


.47 


2.15 


3.63 


6.75 


.20 


.031 


.63 


2.20 


3.80 


6.91 


.25 


.049 


.78 


2.25 


3.98 


7.07 


.30 


.070 


.94 


2.30 


4.15 


7.22 


.35 


.096 


1.09 


2.35 


4.34 


7.38 


.40 


.12 


1.26 


2.40 


4.52 


7.54 


.45 


.16 


1.41 


2.45 


4.71 


7.69 


.50 


.19 


1.57 


2.50 


4.91 


7.85 


.55 


.24 


1.73 


2.55 


5.11 


8.01 


.60 


.28 


1.88 


2.60 


5.31 


8.17 


.65 


.33 


2.04 


2.65 


5.56 


8.32 


.70 


.38 


2.19 


2.70 


5.72 


8.48 


.75 


.44 


2.36 


2.75 


5.94 


8.64 


.80 


.50 


2.51 


2.80 


6.16 


8.79 


.85 


.57 


2.67 


2.85 


6.38 


8.95 


.90 


.64 


2.83 


2.90 


6.60 


9.11 


.95 


.71 


2.98 


2.95 


6.83 


9.27 


1.00 


.78 


3.14 


3.00 


7.07 


9.42 


1.05 


.86 


3.29 


3.05 


7.31 


9.58 


1.10 


.95 


3.46 


3.10 


7.55 


9.74 


1.15 


1.03 


3.61 


3.15 


7.79 


9.89 


1.20 


1.13 


3.77 


3.20 


8.04 


10.05 


1.25 


1.23 


3.93 


3.25 


8.29 


10.21 


1.30 


1.33 


4.08 


3.30 


8.55 


10.37 


1.35 


1.43 


4.24 


3.35 


8.81 


10.52 


1.40 


1.54 


4.39 


3.40 


9.08 


10.68 


1.45 


1.65 


4.56 


3.45 


9.35 


10.84 


1.50 


1.77 


4.71 


3.50 


9.62 


10.99 


1.55 


1.89 


4.87 


3.55 


9.89 


11.15 


1.60 


2.01 


5.03 


3.60 


10.18 


11.31 


1.65 


2.14 


5.18 


3.65 


10.46 


11.47 


1.70 


2.27 


5.34 


3.70 


10.75 


11.62 


1.75 


2.40 


5.49 


3.75 


11.04 


11.78 


1.80 


2.54 


5.65 


3.80 


11.34 


11.94 


1.85 


2.69 


5.81 


3.85 


11.64 


12.09 


1.90 


2.84 


5.97 


3.90 


11.94 


12.25 


1.95 


2.99 


6.13 


3.95 


12.25 


12.41 


2.00 


3.14 


6.28 


4.00 


12.57 


12.57 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 





Table No. 6— Con 


'nued. 




Dlam, Area 


ClrcuiD, 


Dl.m, 


Are. 


Clruura. 


4.05 


12.88 


12,72 


6.25 


30-68 


19.63 


4,10 


13,20 


12.88 


6-30 


31.17 


19.79 


4.15 


13.53 


13.04 


6.35 


31.67 


19.95 


4.21) 


13.85 


13 19 


6-40 


32,17 


20,11 


4.25 


14.19 


13 35 


6 45 


32-67 


20-26 


4.30 


14.52 


13 5! 


6,50 


33.18 


20-42 


4.35 


14.86 


13,60 


6 65 


33.69 


20,58 


4.40 


15,20 


13,82 


6.60 


34,21 


20-73 


4.45 


15.55 


13.98 


6.65 


34.73 


20-89 


4.50 


15.90 


14.14 


6,70 


35.26 


21-06 


4.55 


16,25 


14,29 


6,76 


35.78 


21-20 


4,60 


16 62 


14.46 


6,80 


36,32 


21.36 


4,85 


16, 9S 


14,61 


6.85 


36.85 


21.52 


4,70 


17.35 


14,76 


6. BO 


37.39 


21 68 


4,75 


17.73 


14.92 


6,95 


37,94 


21.83 


4.80 


18,09 


15.08 


7,00 


38.48 


21 99 


4,85 


18,47 


15.24 


7.05 


39.04 


23.15 


4,90 


18.86 


15.39 


7.10 


39,59 


22.30 


4.95 


19,24 


15.55 


7,15 


40.15 


22.46 


5,00 


19,63 


15,71 


7.20 


40.71 


22.62 


5,06 


20.03 


15.86 


7.25 


41,28 


22.78 


5.10 


20.43 


16,02 


7,30 


41.85 


22.93 


5,15 


20,84 


16.18 


7.35 


42.43 


23,09 


5.20 


21.23 


16.34 


7.40 


43.01 


23.25 


5,25 


21,65 


16.49 


7.45 


43.59 


23.40 


5,30 


22,06 


16.66 


7.50 


44.18 


23,56 


5-35 


22 48 


16.81 


7 55 


44.77 


23.72 


5,40 


22,90 


16,96 


7.60 


45 36 


23.88 


5,45 


23,33 


17.12 


7,65 


45.96 


24.03 


S.30 


23.76 


17.28 


7.70 


46.57 


24.19 


5.55 


24,19 


17.44 


7.75 


47.17 


24.35 


5.60 


24,63 


17.59 


7.80 


47,78 


24.50 


5.65 


25.07 


17,75 


7,85 


48.39 


24.66 


5,70 


25 52 


17.91 


7.90 


49.02 


24,82 


5.75 


25.97 


IS. 06 


7.96 


49.64 


24.97 


5.80 


26.42 


18.22 


8.00 


50.26 


25.13 


5.85 


26,88 


18.38 


S.05 


50.89 


25,29 


5.1)0 


27.34 


18,54 


8,10 


51.53 


25.43 


5.95 


27.80 


18.69 


8.16 


52.17 


25.60 


6,00 


28.27 


18.85 


8.20 


52,81 


25,76 


6.05 


28.73 


19.01 


8-25 


53.46 


26.92 


6,10 


29.22 


19 16 


8.30 


54 11 


26,07 


6 15 


29.70 


19 32 


8.35 


54,76 


26.23 


6.20 


30.19 


19.48 


S-40 


65.42 


26,39 



30 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



Table No. 6. — Continued. 



Diam. 


Area 


Circum. 


Diam. 


Area 


Circum. 


8.45 


56.08 


26.55 


9.25 


67.20 


29.06 


8.50 


56.74 


26.70 


9.30 


67.93 


29.22 


8.55 


57.41 


26.86 


9.35 


68.66 


29.37 


8.60 


58.09 


27.02 


9.40 


69.39 


29.53 


8.65 


58.76 


27.17 


9.45 


70.14 


29.69 


8.70 


59.45 


27.33 


9.50 


70.88 


29.84 


8.75 


60.13 


27.49 


9.55 


71.63 


30.00 


8.80 


60.82 


27.65 


9.60 


72.38 


30.15 


8.85 


61.51 


27.80 


9.65 


73.14 


30.32 


8.90 


62.21 


27.96 


9.70 


73.89 


30.47 


8.95 


62.91 


28.12 


9.75 


74.66 


30.63 


9.00 


63.62 


28.27 


9.80 


75.43 


30.79 


9.05 


64.33 


28.43 


9.85 


76.20 


30.94 


9.10 


65.04 


28.59 


9.90 


76.98 


31.10 


9.15 


65.76 


28.74 


9.95 


77.76 


31.26 


9.20 


66.48 


28.90 


10.00 


78.56 


31.42 



To compute the area or circumference of a diameter greater 

than 10 and less than 100: 

Take out the area or circumference from table as 
though the number had one decimal, and move the 
decimal point two places to the right for the area, and 
one place for the circumference. 

EXAMPLE — Wanted the area and circumference of 
56.5. The tabular area for 5.65 is 25.07, and circum- 
ference 17.75. Therefore area for 56.5=2507 and cir- 
cumference= 177.5. 
To compute the area or circumference of a diameter greater 

than 100: 

Divide by a factor, as 2, 3, 4, 5, etc., if practicable, that 
will leave a quotient to be found in table, then multiply 
the tabular area of the quotient by the squaxe of the 
factor, or the tabular circumference by the factor. 

EXAMPLE — Wanted the area and circumference of 
47.5. Dividing by 5, the quotient is 9.5, for which the 
area is 70.88, and the circumference 29.84. There- 
fore area of 70.88X25 = 1772 and circumference= 
29.84X5=149.2. 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



31 



the shuttle type just described. It has, however, 
a far greater electrical efficiency and gives off a 
steadier current than the shuttle type. It is the 
form most generally used for automobile and 
street railway motors. Like the shuttle type of 
armature, the current generated by the slotted 
type of armature is alternating and is con- 
verted into a direct-cur- 
rent by means of a 
commutator of very 
complicated form — see 
Electric Motors. 

Asbestos — See Insu- 
lating Material. 

Automobiles, Typi- 
cal American. Gaso- 
line. A — Runabout. 
B — Touring car. C — 
Light car with detach- 
able Tonneau. D — 
Stanhope. E — Road- 
ster. 

Electric. F — Runabout. G — Park trap. H — 
Phaeton. J — Brougham. K — Depot-bus or 
light delivery wagon. See first page for drawing. 

Axles, Front and Rear. So far it has not 

been found practical to combine the steering and 
tractive functions of an automobile in one set of 
wheels and axle, it is necessary to use a rigid 
front axle with knuckle- jointed spindles and 




32 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



utilize the tractive power of the rear wheels only 
to propel the car. Some of the earlier forms of 
steering axles had the wheel pivots inclined so as 
to bring the projection of the pivot axis in line 
with the point of contact of the wheel with the 
ground, but as such constructions have not proved 




satisfactory they have in most cases been aban- 
doned. 

Front Axles. Figures 13 and 14 show four 
styles of front axles with steering-pivot ends : A 
shows a solid axle of square section, with the 
steering-pivot jaws and axle proper, of a single 
forging — B represents an axle of tubular cross- 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



section with the steering-pivot jaws bored out to 
receive the tubular axle which is firmly brazed 
therein— C shows another style of tubular axle, 
in which the steering-pivot jaw ends are turned 
down to fit the inside diameter of the tube and 
are also brazed in position, while D illustrates a 




one-piece axle with vertical hubs instead of jaws, 
which carry L-shaped steering-pivots, instead of 
the usual form of knuckles. 

Reah Axles. A great many medium and 
high-powered cars have a double side-chain drive; 
this necessitates free driving wheels and a rigid 
rear axle with this form of drive. 



34 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



Figure 15 illustrates three forms of rigid rear 
axles for the above described form of drive: E 
shows a solid axle of circular section with straight 
spindles for hubs with plain-bearings — F, a 
solid axle of square section with taper spindles 
for plain-bearing hubs and G an axle of tubular 
section with spindles fitted for ball-bearing hubs. 



c 




^ 




c 



I 



REAR AXLES 



O 



Fig 15 



Automobiles employing a single chain drive 
from the motor to the rear axle, generally use 
either a live solid rear axle with one driving 
wheel earned upon a loose sleeve attached to one 
of the gears of the differential, or a rigid tubular 
axle with a divided live-shaft, to the outer ends 
of which the driving wheels are keyed. Axles of 
these types are shown in Figure 16 : H illustrates 



THR AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 35 



,!&, 



n 

5 



p. I — ^ n 



^ 



36 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

a solid live rear axle with plain-bearings and 
sprocket on the differential gear case. 

Normally both the axle and the sleeve rotate in 
unionism, but on the car departing from a 
straight course or turning a comer, the sleeve 
will move faster or slower than the axle, accord- 
ing to the direction of curvature. A rigid tubular 
axle with a divided live driving shaft is shown at 
J; the tubular portions of the axle have spiders 
on their inner ends, which are connected around 
the differential gear and sprocket by means of 
shoulder-studs with nuts, as shown in the draw- 
ing. The type of axle illustrated at H may have 
either plain or roller-bearings, while the type 
shown at J is usually constructed with four sets 
of ball-bearings, two sets at the outer ends of 
the tubular axle and two sets near the center, 
one on either side of the differential case, within 
the hubs of the spiders. 

In Figure 17, K and L show respectively a 
live solid rear axle and a rigid tubular axle, 
equipped with roller-bearings. The spring lugs 
form part of the roller-bearing boxes of the live 
axle, while they are usually brazed to the tubular 
axle near its outer ends. 

A rigid tubular axle with ball-bearing live 
driving shaft is illustrated in Figure 18, the ball- 
cup or race is adjustable by means of a hexagon 
upon its outer extension in the rear of the hub of 
the wheel and is held securely in position and 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 




38 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



prevented from turning by means of the clamping 
device shown on the upper portion of the bear- 
ing. No separate adjustments for the inner two 
sets of ball-bearings are necessary, as the teeth 
of the spur gears of the differential which are 
keyed to the inner ends of the divided driving 
shaft, being free to slide upon themselves, allow 
the shafts M to have a slight longitudinal move- 
ment within the axle tube, thus taking up the 



ID 




L 



BALL BEARING AXLE 



Fig. 18 



wear of each pair of ball-bearings with a single 
adjusting mechanism. 

Steering Knuckles. In order to obtain 
ease of operation and secure the shortest turning 
radius with the least movement of the steering 
wheel or lever, the knuckle of the steering pivot 
should be as close to the center of the wheel as 
is possible. It is ako of great importance that 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



39 



Fig. 19 





c 



uitJ 





STEERING KNUCKLE 



40 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

the steering knuckles should be as heavy as is 
practically consistent with the size and weight of 
the car for which they are intended. If this 
important point be neglected, rapid wear and 
probable fracture of the knuckles may be looked 
for. 

The earliest form of steering knuckle for a 
pivoted axle was invented by Lankensperger of 
Munich in 1819, since that time but little change 
has been made in the basic principle of the 
pivoted axle. 

Steering knuckles at present in use consist of 
two principal types: a spindle and pivot of T 
shape and an axle with jaw ends — a spindle and 
pivot of L shape and an axle with vertical hubs. 

A steering knuckle with a spindle and pivot of 
T shape is shown in Figure 19. The spindle 
and pivot N and the steering arms O are usually 
a one-piece forging. The steering arms O are 
connected by means of a suitable distance rod 
and the steering lever P is attached to one of the 
pivots N by turning a shoulder upon it and pin- 
ning and brazing the steering lever and pivot hub 
together. 

Figure 20 shows a steering knuckle with spindle 
and pivot of L shape. The steering arm R goes 
on the lower end of one pivot Q only, the other 
pivot having the combined steering arm and lever 
S on its lower end. The steering arms being 
detachable, the device may be operated from the 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 41 



r 



iQi 



Fks. 20 



r^ — ^^ 



^ 



3_^ 



IQJ 



7~~= 



I I 
I I 





z 




STEERING KNUCKLE 



42 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

right or left hand side by simply exchanging the 
levers R and S. The steering lever S has a ball 
upon its outer end to fit in the socket on the 
connecting rod of the steering mechanism. 

Backfiring, Causes of. Tliis is a term 

applied to an explosion or impulse which forces 
the flywheel of a motor suddenly backwards, that 
is, in the opposite direction to its proper rotation. 
The term is sometimes used in connection with 
explosions which occur in the muffler from the 
ignition of an accumulation of unbumed gases. 

Causes. An overheated combustion chamber, 
due to a poor circulation of the cooling water — 
causing self-ignition of the charge before the 
proper time. 

Advancing the ignition point too far ahead 
when the motor is running slowly under a heavy 
load — flywheel has not sufficient momentum to 
force the piston over the dead center, against the 
pressure of the already ignited and expanding 
gases. 

The presence of a deposit of carbon (sootj or 
a small projecting surface in the combustion 
chamber which may become incandescent and 
cause premature ignition — see also Starting 
Troubles. 

Ball and Socket Joints. To produce a 

flexible joint capable of operation within certain 
limitations in any direction, the ball and socket 
form of joint is generally used on the ends of 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



the rod whith connefts the arm of the steering 

mechanism with the steering lever attached to the 

hub of one of the steering pivots of the front axle. 

Figure 21 shows a form of ball-joint used on 

several makes of cars. The steering lever B has 

a ball on its outer end, 

which is held in the 

socket A by means of 

a threaded bushing as 

shown in the drawing. 

This bushing can be 

adjusted to take up all 

lost motion or wear of 

the working parts and 

is held from turning by 

means of the clamping 

device shown at * the 

upper end of the socket 

A. The arm of the 

steering mechanism is pi-ovided with a stud C 

having a ball similar to tlie one on the end of the 

steering lever II, which also fits into a socket A. 

The two sockets are suitably connected by means 

of a rod. 

Ball-bearing Axles— See Axles. 

Ball-bearing Hubs— See Hubs. 

Band-brakes— Sec Brakes 

Battery Charging Outfit. A four or six volt 
storage battery used fori;^nilion purposes may be 
chained very simply in the following manner: 




44 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

Use ten cells of gravity battery. They are low 
in first cost and inexpensive to recharge. Sul- 
phate of copper, commonly known as blue stone 
or blue vitrol and water, is all that is needed to 
charge the cells, no acids being used. When not 
in use, put on a closed circuit with a resistance 
coil of about 150 to 200 ohms, as otherwise a 
slight local action takes place when the cells are 
not in use — see Batteries, Dry and Primary, 
also Storage Battery Charging. 

Batteries, Dry and Primary. To ascertain 

the internal resistance of a dry or primary 
battery, proceed as follows: With a suitable 
voltmeter, obtain the voltage of the battery at its 
terminals when on open circuit. With a known 
resistance in the battery circuit — say 100 feet of 
No. 10 B. & S. Gauge copper wire — again obtain 
the voltage of the battery, also note the amperage 
with an ammeter; this, however, must be done 
quickly before polarization occurs. 

Let V be the voltage of the battery at its 
terminals when on open circuit, and v the voltage 
of "the battery with a known resistance in the 
circuit, let C be the current in amperes flowing 
through the known resistance and R the required 
internal resistance of the dry or primary battery, 
then 

T. V — V 

To demonstrate the truth of the above formula 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 45 



and also to prove the correctness of the instru- 
ments used in making the test, when the value 
of the internal resistance R has been ascertained, 
then C, the current flowing with a known resist- 
ance in the battery circuit, should equal in value 
the result of the formula given below, which is 

^ R 

Dry Batteries. In one respect dry batteries 
have a decided advantage over storage batteries 
for ignition purposes, from the fact that on 
account of their high internal resistance they 
cannot be so quickly deteriorated by short 
circuiting. 

On account of this high internal resistance, 
diy batteries will not give so large a volume of 
current as storage batteries, but a set of dry 
batteries may be short circuited for five minutes 
without apparent injury and will recuperate in 
from twenty to thirty minutes, while a storage 
battery would in all probabiUty be ruined under 
the same conditions. 

If dry batteries only are used for ignition pur- 
poses, two sets should be carried, of not less than 
6 cells each, connected with a two-point switch. 
One set of batteries should be used not to exceed 
thirty minutes and then the other set switched 
on. In this manner the batteries will have a 
much longer life than if used continuously — see 
Diagram, Wiring for a Single Cylinder Motor, 



46 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

A dry battery of the .usual type consists of a 
zinc cell which forms the negative element of the 
battery. The electrolyte is generally a jelly-like 
compound containing sal-ammoniac, cliloride of. 
zinc, etc. The carbon or positive element is 
enclosed in a sack or bag containing dioxide of 
manganese and crushed coke, which are the 
depolarizing agents of the battery. 

Dry batteries which have become exhausted 
may in most cases be recuperated in the following 
manner: First disconnect the cells from each 
other and remove their pasteboard covers, then 
drill a hole in the sealing compound on top of the 
cell, about one-quarter of an inch in diameter 
and at least 2 inches in depth so as to insure 
getting below the sealing compound. Take 1 
ounce of bisulphate of mercury and put in a 
porcelain or earthenware vessel (on no account 
use a metal vessel) and pour over it one-half pint 
of boiling water — when cold, draw, off the clear 
solution, being careful not to disturb the yellow 
precipitate left at the bottom of the vessel, which 
is useless and should be thrown away at once, 
as it is a rank poison. Dissolve 4 ounces of 
sal-ammoniac in 1 pint of hot water and when 
cold mix with the first solution and the recuper- 
ative agent is then ready for use. Take a small 
glass funnel, or a tin one that is thoroughly 
painted or enameled, and introduce about a 
tablespoonful of the liquid into each cell through 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 47 

the hole already drilled for this purpose. The 
liquid must be introduced into the cells very 
slowly, as it will take a long time to absorb, and 
the cells should be allowed to stand at least 12 
hours after filling before being ready for use. 

Primary Batteries. When there is no 
incandescent light circuit at hand or the electric 
current is of the alternating type, primary batteries 
of some form or other are very useful to charge 
small storage batteries which are used for ignition 
purposes. 

The voltage of a set of primary batteries to be 
used for charging a small storage battery, should 
exc eed the voltage of the storage battery by at 
least 30 per cent. 

Primary batteries of the open -circuit type, such 
as sal-ammoniac cells, are useless for charging 
purposes, only batteries of the closed-circuit or 
constant current type are suitable. 

A very simple and inexpensive form of closed- 
circuit battery for charging purposes is the single 
liquid type, which uses zinc and carbon electrodes 
in a 20 per cent solution of sulphuric acid and 
water, with nitrate of soda as the depolarizing 
agent. 

For a 4 volt storage battery four such cells are 
required, while for a 6 volt storage battery six 
cells will be necessary for a proper charge. 

This form of primary battery has a voltage of 
li volts per cell. 



48 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

The articles necessary for a complete charging 
outfit are as follows : One small pocket ammeter 
reading up to 5 amperes, one two-point switch, 
one resistance coil or rheostat (home made), one 
set of closed-circuit type of primary batteries and 
about 25 feet of No. 16 B. & S. Gauge, Okonite 
or Kerite stranded copper wire for the connections. 

The method of connecting the primary batteries, 
resistance coil (rheostat), ammeter and switch is 
plainly shown in Wiring Diagram No. 1. The 
positive pole of the primary battery should always 
be connected with the positive pole of the storage 
battery, the carbon element is always the positive 
electrode in both dry and primary forms of 
batteries. If the polarity of the terminals of the 
storage battery are not indicated on the case by 
the + and — signs, which represent positive and 
negative respectively, their polarity may be 
readily ascertained by means of a piece of 
moistened litmus paper (paper soaked in a 
solution of iodide of starch). Place the piece of 
moistened litmus paper on a board or other non- 
conducting material and bring the wires from the 
storage battery terminals into contact with 
opposite ends of the paper for a few seconds 
only — one end of the paper will turn red, this 
will be next to the wire connected with the 
negative pole of the storage battery. 

The resistance coil or rheostat may be made 
very simply as follows: Take a piece of hard- 



THE AUTOMOBILE HANU-BOOK 




50 THE AUTOMOHILK HA\D-B()()K 

wood 3 inches s(|iiare and 1.5 inches long and turn 
down about IS J inches of its length to a diameie" 
of 2^ inches in the manner shown. Upon this 
turned part cut with a round -nose tool a groove 
or thread one-sixteenth of an inch deep, with 8 
threads to the inch. In this groove wind about 
50 feet of No. 18 B. W. Gauge bare soft iron 
wire and connect with a bar and sliding contact 
as shown in the drawing. 

To charge the storage battery, move the sliding- 
contact to the right until all the resistance is in 
use, then move the switch-finger to the point on 
the left and adjust the sliding-contact by moving 
it to the left until the ammeter shows 3 amperes. 
Moving the switch-finger to the right will put the 
battery in the circuit for charging and the sliding- 
contact should be again adjusted until the 
ammeter shows 3 amperes. The sliding-contact 
should be adjusted from time to time to keep the 
charging current at 3 amperes. 

If the storage battery be of 12 ampere-hour 
capacity it will take 4 hours to properly charge it, 
if of 18 ampere-hour capacity, 6 hours. The 
ampere-hour capacity of the battery divided by 
the amperes of the charging current gives the 
number of hours required to fully charge the 
battery when exhausted. 

After the storage battery is fully charged the 
electrodes should be lifted out of the solution as 
shown in the drawing, by means of the cover to 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 51 

which they are shown attached, until the battery 
is again required for use. 

Battery Syringe, Use of. Battery syringes 

are made in two forms. One form of hard rubber 
with a sUding piston, the other of soft or flexible 
rubber in the shape of a bulb to be operated by 
pressure of the hand. 

Either form of battery syringe is used to with- 
draw a portion of the electrolyte or solution 
from a storage battery cell for the purpose of 
afterwards testing its density and specific gravity. 

Battery Troubles, Causes of. The following 

are some of the troubles which may occur to a 
battery : 

Loose or corroded terminals will cause a poor 
electrical contact and failure of the battery to 
work properly — Remove all thumb-nuts from the 
binding-posts and clean their contact surfaces 
thoroughly with emery cloth and screw up firmly 
after replacing. 

Broken wires, or the insulation being worn off 
some part of the wiring of the car, causing a 
short-circuit by contact with the metal of the 
frame — The wires should be disconnected from 
the battery, and the battery tested across its 
terminals with an ammeter — If the battery is in 
good condition, reconnect one wire only to the 
battery and with an extra piece of wire attached 
to the other battery terminal, test the coil, com- 
mutator and switch connections to locate the 



52 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

break and around the metal of the frame for the 
short-circuit; if not found, reverse the wires and 
proceed as before. In this manner the break or 
short-circuit must .eventually be discovered. 

Weak or run-down batteries cause a motor to 
misfire and run irregularly — A new set of cells 
should be used to test the motor with; if it stiD 
misfires the trouble must be looked for elsewhere. 

Dry batteries will show practically their fuD 
voltage when almost exhausted — A small pocket 
ammeter should be used to test each cell with. 
If any of the cells show less than 5 or 6 amperes 
they should be at once discarded. 

Dry batteries polarize very quickly if left on a 
closed circuit for a few minutes. This is generally 
caused by the operator of the car omitting to 
open the switch, when the motor has stopped for 
some reason or other — If allowed to rest for 20 
to 30 minutes, they will generally recuperate suffi- 
ciently to enable the operator to start the motor. 

Dry batteries will also polarize from too rapid 
working or too long use without a rest — Two sets 
of batteries should always be carried on a car and 
one set at a time used for about 30 minutes, the 
other set then being used for another 30 minutes. 
This method will not only give more satisfactory 
results than by using a single set, but will pro- 
long the life of the batteries. 

A dead or exhausted cell in a set of dry 
batteries will prevent the rest of the cells from 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 53 

working properly — With a small pocket an, neter 
test the amperage of each cell separately until the 
dead cell is found — Remove the dead cell and 
substitute a new one in its place if possible, if 
not, cut the dead cell out of the battery circuit. 

The amperage of a dry battery when new is 
about 12 to 15 amperes on a closed circuit. 
When an ammeter only shows 5 or 6 amperes, 
the cell is practically exhausted and should be 
replaced by a new one. 

The voltage of a storage battery should never 
be allowed to fall below 1.75 volts per cell. This 
applies to each individual cell and not a set of 
cells in one case. 

When fully charged a storage battery should 
show 2.2 volts per cell. 

A storage battery should never be allowed to 
remain in a discharged condition over twelve hours. 

Never test or experiment with a storage battery 
by short-circuiting it across its terminals by 
means of a piece of wire, an old file or a screw- 
driver. 

Troubles with storage batteries, resulting from 
fiulure to comply with the above conditions, can 
only be remedied by the makers. 

Bearings, Plain, Ball and Roller. Plain 

bearings are as a rule in general use for thv 
motors and speed-change gears of gasoline cars, 
and some makers prefer to use them on the road 
wheels as well, on account of their simplicity. 



54 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

ease of renewal when worn and practically inex- 
pensive construction. 

Ball-bearings are also used on the armature 
shafts of electric automobile motors and in the 
hubs of the front and rear wheels of different 
makes of cars. Gars equipped with rigid tubular 
rear axles usually have the live driving shaft 
fitted with ball-bearings. 

Live rear axles are either plain or roller-bear- 
ing, as their construction usually renders the use 
of ball-bearings impracticable. 

Plain - BEARINGS. For plain -bearings, the 
shafts of which are continuously running at a 
high rate of speed, such as motors and speed - 
change gears, the working pressure per square 
inch should not exceed 400 pounds. As the arc 
of contact or actual bearing surface of a journal- 
bearing is assumed as one-third of the circum- 
ference of the journal itself, the pressure per 
square inch upon a bearing is therefore equal to 
the total load upon the bearing, divided by the 
product of the diameter of the journal into the 
length of the bearing. 

I^t D be the diameter of the journal or shaft 
at its bearing, and L the length of the bearing. 
if W be the total load or pressure upon the bear- 
ing and P the pressure in pounds per square incli 
of bearing surface, then 

DxL 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 55 

If the total load or pressure on the bearing be 
known and the diameter of the shaft given, then 
the proper length of the bearing will be 

L= ^^- 
DXP 

If the length of the bearing be known and 
other conditions as before given, then the proper 
diameter of the journal will be 

PXL 

The length of a plain-bearing should not be 
less than the following proportions: 

One and one-third diameters for crank-shaft 
wrist-pin bearings. 

Two diameters for crank -shaft bearings. 

Two and one-half diameters for speed-change 
gears. 

Three diameters for live rear axles. 

Four diameters for wheel hub bearings. 

Ball-bearings. The friction of a well de- 
signed ball-bearing varies directly witli the load 
and is entirely independent of the speed. The 
starting friction of ball-bearings is far less than 
the best lubricated plain -bearing. 

While ball-bearings give less rolling friction 
than plain-bearings, at their best they still involve 
a considerable loss of power, due to the fact that 
they roll in opposite directions and consequently 
rub against each other, with the result that the 



56 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



balls soon wear out, in addition to the power 
losses by friction. 

For automobile use the ball-races should have 
rounded grooves and be also ground perfectly true. 

Table No. 7 gives the safe working load for 
steel balls of varying diameters. It must be con- 
sidered in this connection that the working load 
is carried by one ball at a time. 

Table No. 7. 
Safe Working Load of Steel Balls. 



Diameter of ball. 


i 

500 


780 


i 

1125 


1530 


i 
2000 


ft 
2530 


f 
3125 


Working load per 
ball in pounds. 



Roller-bearings . The amount of power that 
may be saved by the use of roller-bearings is con- 
siderable and the only obstacle to their more 
general use is the difficulty of obtaining a bearing 
of simple form which may be easily adjusted in 
case of wear. 

Roller-bearings of parallel form being incapable 
of adjustment, this objection has been in part 
overcome by the use of rollers of conical form, 
which in some cases are designed to also take up 
the end thrust which occurs in automobile use. 

The usual method of mounting rollers for 

bearings is to enclose them in a suitable form of 

cage, in which the rollers are se^axaV^, ^o that 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 57 




58 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

when rotating on their axes the rollers do not 
come into contact with each other. In some 
forms of roller-bearings it is considered good 
practice to include end thrust ball-bearings at the 
outer ends of the roller cages, so as to still 
further reduce the friction incident to the rotation 
of the roller cages. 

Binding Posts — See Terminals. 

Bodies, Styles of. The automobile bodies 
illustrated in Figures 22 and 23 are reproduced 
from dimensions taken from bodies of cars in 
actual use and are simply given to show what 
has been accomplished in the design of automo- 
bile bodies at the present state of the industry. 

Bodies for cars with vertical motor in front, 

under a hood or bonnet. 

A — For touring car with four-cylinder motor — 

provision for tonneau in rear. 

B — Runabout body for car with two-cylinder 
motor — space for baggage basket at the rear. 

C — Body for light touring car with baggage 
box in the rear of the body. 

I) — For light runabout car — space for extra 
tire and tools in the rear of the body. 

Bodies for cars with horizontal motor under- 
neath the body proper. 

E — Runabout body with tool and battery box 
in front — provision for tonneau in rear. 

F — Body for electric automobile with extra 
front seat — ^provision for toux Irays oi b«Lllei:les^ 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAXD-BOOi: 59 







BODIES 



F(G. 23 



60 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

one in front under the . extra seat and three 
trays under the seat and rear extension of the 
body. 

G— Runabout body with imitation hood in 
front, containing gasoline and water tanks — 
provision for tonneau in rear. 

H — Touring car body with folding front seat, 
with baggage space— large space for baggage in 
the rear of the body. 

Body-Hangers, Forms of. Since the incep- 
tion of the automobile, the frame or running gear 
of the car is in nearly all cases attached to the 
springs and the body carried upon the frame. 
The parts or in some cases actually extensions of 
the frame are or should be properly termed frame- 
hangers, but they are erroneously and almost 
universally known as body-hangers, from the term 
applied to the constructions used in horse-drawn 
vehicles. Some forms of frame-hangers are of 
pressed steel construction, but the usual forms 
are made of drop-forgings. Figure 24 shows 
some of the forms of drop-forged frame-hangers 
for automobile use: The front or what is 
generally known as the pump-handle form of 
hanger is shown at J, the rear or fish-hook form 
is shown at K and the forms of hangers used for 
attaching the inner ends of the springs to the 
frame are shown at L and M. 

Bolts and Nuts, Locking Devices for— See 

Locking Devices. 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



61 



Bore and Stroke, Relation of Horsepower 

to. The horsepower of a gasoline motor when 
the explosive charge and degree of compression 
are at their best, depends entirely on the piston 




displacement or the volume swept out by the 
piston and the number of revolutions made by 
the motor. The term cylinder volume should 
not be confused with the expression piston dis- 
placement, as the former includes the combustion 



62 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

space, along with the piston displacement. As a 
naatter of fact, the smaller the cylinder volume is 
in relation to the piston displacement, the greater 
will be the eflSciency of the motor, as the com- 
bustion space will be smaller, the degree of com- 
pression consequently greater and the residue of 
burned gases smaller. The only limitation to the 
degree of compression in the combustion chamber 
is the danger of premature or spontaneous 
ignition of the explosive charge. 

Brakes, Elementary Forms of. A brake is 

a mechanism which is a necessary part of the 
machinery of an automobile and enables the 
operator by exerting a slight amount of force on 
a lever to reduce the momentum of the moving 
car. Brakes used on automobiles may be divided 
into three classes: Hub or rear wheel brakes, 
transmission and differential gear brakes. Brakes 
have also been applied to the tires of the rear 
wheels, but have proved unsatisfactory and have 
been abandoned. The forms of brakes in use 
are single, or double-acting, foot or hand oper- 
ated, and of the band, block or expanding ring 
types. 

Figure 25, at A, B and C, shows three forms 
of the simplest type of single-acting band-brake. 
This type of brake can only be operated suc- 
cessfully with the brake wheel running in one 
direction only, which is indicated by the arrows 
in the drawing. If the brakes be operated in the 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 0)3 




64 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

reverse direction to that indicated by the arrows 
the result will be to jerk the lever or pedal out of 
the control of the operator of the car. 

The three forms of band-brakes shown at A, 
B and C are all of the same principle, the differ- 
ence being in the location of the fixed end of the 
brake-band and the shape of the operating lever. 
Type D is a form of double acting block-brake, 
which is designed with a view to eliminate any 
strain or side thrust upon the shaft of the brake 
wheel which may be caused by the braking action 
of the device. Types E, G and H are three 
types of double acting band -brakes, in which the 
brake may be applied with the brake wheel 
running in either direction. 

Type F is a form of double acting block-brake , 
in which the right hand ends of the brake-shoe 
aims are pivoted to stationary supports, and the 
left hand ends connected together by means of a 
link and bell-crank lever as shown in the drawing. 

In Figure 26 a form of double acting block- 
brake I is shown, which is extremely powerful on 
account of its peculiar construction, in that it has 
a double leverage upon the brake wheel, which 
may be readily seen by reference to the drawing. 
Types J and K are of the form known as internal 
brakes and of the expanding ring type, the 
brakes operating upon the inner surface or periph- 
cry of the brake wheel, instead of the outside. 
They are known as hub brakes, being usually 



'^i"^ 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



65 



attached to the hubs of the rear wheels of the 
car. Tj^ L shows a form of block-brake in 
which the pivoted brake arms are drawn together 
by the eccentric located on the brake lever shaft. 
When the lever is released the brake-shoe arms 




are forced apart by the action of the coil spring 
between the upper ends of the arms. 

Brake Test with Prony Brake. There is 

only one way by which the actual horsepower of 
a gasoline motor may be correctly ascertained and 
that is by the use of the Prony brake, so called 



66 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-ROOK 

after its inventor. This simple device gives the 
actual energy in foot-pounds per minute delivered 
by the motor at its driving shaft. 

The apparatus for making a brake test is fully 
illustrated in Figure 27. Two brake-blocks A 
partially surround the pulley P and are jittached 
to the clamping pieces B and C, which hold the 
brake-blocks upon the pulley by means of the 
bolts D, springs E and thumb-nuts F. The 
lever G is double-ended for the dual purpose of 
balancing itself and also supplying a place of 
attachment for the weight W to balance the weight 
of the spring scale S. 

In using this form of Prony brake, the motor 
is started in the direction indicated by the arrow 
on the drawing, the brake -blocks A are then 
tightened by means of the springs E and. thumb- 
nuts F. Then the reading of the spring scale S 
and the speed of the pulley P are taken. 

The motor should be tested at varying speeds 
and the pull on the spring scale S noted for each. 

The actual horsepower can then be calculated 
for each test and what is known as the critical 
speed of the motor determined, that is the speed 
at which the motor develops the greatest brake 
horsepower. 

'^The following formula gives the actual horse- 
power obtained from the results of a Prony 
brake test: Let L be the length of the scale 
lever in inches, and S the pull indicated by the 



THE ATTOMomLE HAND-BOOK 



67 




68 THK AITOMOBILK HAXD-BOOK 

spring scale in pounds. If N be the number of 

revolutions per minute of the pulley R and B.H.P. 

the actual or brake horsepower of the motor, 

then 

_LXSXN 

^•^•^•~ 63,025 

Example : A motor of 5 inches bore and stroke 
at 600 revolutions per minute gives a pull at the 
spring scale of 32 pounds, the scale lever is 24 
inches long. What is the brake horsepower of 
the motor? 

Answer: Twenty-four inches multiplied by 8 
and by 600 equals 460,800— this divided by 
63,025 gives 7.30 as the brake horsepower of 
the motor. 

The weight J is shown for use in case the floor 
of the testing room should be of brick or cement ; 
if of wood the eye-bolt H can be screwed directly 
into the floor. 

Breakdowns. As breakdowns are of frequent 
occurrence it is of the utmost importance that all 
the parts of a car that need adjustment or inspec- 
tion should be readily accessible. Serious break- 
downs should never occur on a well kept car. 

The usual breakdowns are due to forgetfulness 

• 

on the part of the operator to make some 

necessary adjustment on the car, or the lack of 
tools or extra parts required to repair a break. 
On a well kept car troubles as a rule only occur 
one at a time and those generally at long intervals. 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 69 

A little logical thiuking and a few minutes spent 
in testing usually locates a trouble so that when 
it is removed a start may be made without further 
hunting. 

The owner of a car should once in a while 
undertake the task of cleaning the car and making 
the necessary adjustments therein. 

The mechanic may then, under the instruction 
of the owner, locate a trouble and remove it in a 
very short time. A bad breakdown may be 
described as one which will take over half a day 
to repair. Many an apparently serious break- 
down occurs simply from the fact that the operator 
fails to examine the condition of the batteries or 
the state of the spark plugs or commutator before 
starting on a trip. These details, being very 
simple and requiring only a few minutes' work, 
Should-never be neglected. Before starting on a 
long trip, to insure getting to the end of the 
journey without delays, the car should be 
thoroughly overhaule*! and anything that might 
give trouble carefully inspected. 

Breakdowns, Causes of. Any one of the fol- 
lowing troubles may be the cause of a motor 
stopping or not working properly: 

Soot or grease on the spark plug. 

Defective insulation of the spark plug. 

Points of the spark plug too far apart. 

Contacts of the coil vibrator badly corroded. 

Broken wires or loose batterv terminals. 



70 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



Leaky admission or exhaust- valve. 

Seized piston or bearing. 

Broken valve-stem or valve-spring. 

Batteries exhausted. 

Defective spark coil. 

Poor contact at the commutator. 

Defective insulation of the secondary wires. 

Broken piston ring. 

Stuck piston. 

Defective packing. C^^ 

Gams, Shape of. The cam shown at M in 
Figure 28 and of the type in general use for lift- 
ing the admission and exhaust 
valves of gasoline motors, has 
two serious objections to its 
extended use. On account of 
its shape, excessive pounding 
of the valve on its seat is pro- 
duced and the time of admis- 
sion or discharge of the gases 
from the combustion cham- 
ber of the motor very lim- 
ited, as the valve has only a 
full lift or opening for a brief 
instant of time. 

The cam illustrated at N removes the objections 
stated above by being of somewhat larger 
diameter than cam M, consequently giving an 
easier lift to the valve and a longer time for the 
valve to remain fully open. To replace the 




THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



ordinary form of cam by this improvement it is 
in most cases simply necessary to shorten the 
valve-lifter rod at its upper end, by half the 
amount of the increase of the cam diameter, the 
lift of the valve remaining the same as before. 

Table No. 8. 
Dimensions op Cap Sorbwb. 



II 




"i?er" 


*r 


1 

1 

2 


1 


11 


1 

i 
t 
i 

I 

!il 


s 
II 


ll 


1 

It 


20 

18 
16 
14 
\2 

13 
1! 
10 
9 
8 
7 
7 


t 

1 

IE 

!| 

n 


1 

S 

is 
li 


h 
u 

3" 


ii 


,1 

IJ 



Gap Screws, Dimensions of— Sec Table No. 8. 

Carbon, Deposit of. The formation of a car- 
bon deposit in the combustion chamber of a 
gasoline motor is usually accompanied by the 
smell of unburned or unconsumcd gasoline or 
burned lubricating oil. 

The deposit is caused either by the excessive 
use of lubricating oil or too rich an explosive 



72 THE AUTOMOBILE HAXD-BOOK 

mixture. Premature ignition is often the result 
of a sooty combustion chamber; to prevent it 
until such time as the obstruction may be 
removed, run with as little gasoline and as much 
air as possible to prevent or avoid premature 
ignition. 

Carbon, Use of. Carbcm is the positive ele- 
ment or electrode in nearly all commercial forms 
of dry and primary forms of batteries, it is also 
used as brushes or current distributers for both 
dynamos and electric motors. The brushes 
which convey the 
current from the 
storage batteries 
to the armature 
of an electric au- 
tomobile motor 
are usually of 
carbon. 

Carbureters, 
Construction of. 
'I' he carbureter 
shown in the ac- 
companying il- 
lustration, Fig- 
11:0 29, is of the jet form of float-feed tj-pe. 

The chani!>c'r A of the carbureter contains the 
float li. Iliriiu;;li the center of which passes the 
3tcm of the nw<llc-vulvc C, which keeps the pipi- 
D leadint; to the (yusoliiie tank normally clo.-«<l. 



Qt_L Fig, 29 


n = m 


E- 


rm 


K 


K 


1! 




— •li- 


itfi 






-Aj i 


m 


H 


41^ 




(J^ H 


M 


5X-D " 


CARBURETER 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



When the level of the gasoline in the chamber 
A falb, the fioat B. through the links E, small 
levers F and grooved collar G. raises the stem of 
the needle-valve C, thus permitting more gasoline 
to enter the chamber A, until the normal level is 
again restored. 

The mixing-chamber H has an iniier tube .1, 
which surrounds the jet or nozzle K. During 
the admission stroke of the motor-piston, air is 
drawn into and thnmgh the mixing- chamber H, 
in the direction of the arrows, a small stream of 
gasoline is in consequence drawn up b_v suction 
from the opening in the jet or nozzle K, mixing 
with the air in the chamber II. The upper end 
of the stem of the needle-valve C is provided 
with a small 
knob L, by which ' 
the carbureter 
may be flushed 
for the purpose 
of starting the 
motor. .\ny sur- 
plus gasoline is 
carried off by 
means of the 
vent M. 

The spray 
form of float-feed 
carbureter shown in Figure :fl). lias the float B and 
needle-valve stem C in one pic<o. When the gas- 




CARBURETER 



74 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



oline level in the chamber A is lowered, the needle- 
valve stem C falls with the float B and allows more 
gasoline to enter the chamber A, through the open- 
ing in the connection at D. The screw E with 
thumb-piece F and lock-nut G is for the purpose of 
regulating the volume of the spray at the nozzle 
K, by means of the cone-shaped point H of the 
screw E. The nozzle K is surrounded by a tube 
J, through which the air is drawn by the induc- 
tive action of the motor-piston. The carbureter 
may be flushed by depressing the float with the 
small plunger M, which is kept normally out of 
contact with the float by the spring L. 

Mixing Valves. Since the adoption of liquid 
fuels for explosive motors, numerous forms of 
carbureters have been designed, with a view to 
eliminate the complications of the float-feed type. 

The most practi- 
cal form of such 
devices, known 
as mixing valves, 
are very suitable 
for marine or 
automobile mo- 
tors, where the 
speed is not con- 
s t a n 1 1 y being 
changed, and aie 
specially adapted for motors that run at a uniform 
speed. Figure 3 1 illustrates one form of mixing 




THE AUTOMOBILE HAXD-BOOK 



valve. It consists of a globular chamber A, within 
which is a valve B, controlled by a spring C car- 
ried by the seat D on the valve-stem guide E, 
which forms a part or portion of the threaded 
cover F. The gasoline from the supply tank is fed 
through a suitable pipe screwed into the threaded 
connection at G, to the opening in the seat of the 
valve B. The rate of feed of the gasoline is regu- 
lated by means of the needle-valve H, with knurled 
thiimb-nut J and lock-spring K. The suction of 
the motor-piston draws the valve B from its seat 
and at the same time uncovers the opening in the 
valve seat lead- 
ing from the gas- 
oline supply pipe 
at G and allows 
of the flow of 1 
small quantity of 
gasoline. 

The gasoline 
mixes with the air 
drawn through 
the valve open- 
ing and the fric- 
tion of passing 
around the nar- 
row space be- 
tween the valve 
and its seat insures ti unifonn mixture of gasoline 
and tar. 



F^'G. 32 K^, ^^ 






fi, 




in 


i-C 


fffl 




MIXING VAL\ 


'E 



76 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

Another form of mixing valve is shown in 
Figure 32, in which the gasoline supply is con- 
trolled by the cone point on the stem A of the 
valve B. The cone-point of the valve-stem A 
entirely closes the opening leading from the supply 
pipe at G, but keeps the valve B slightly ofiF its 
seat as shown. 

The valve B is held in position by means of 
the spring E, located around the guide of the 
valve-stem, which forms a part of the cover D of 
the valve chamber C. 

The amount of gasoline fed to the motor is reg- 
ulated by the screw F, with thumb-nut J and 
lock-nut H. 

The air is drawn through the carbureters or 
mixing valves in the direction indicated by the 
arrows. 

Carbureter Troubles. There are several 
things which may prevent a proper explosive 
charge from reaching the combustion chamber 
of a motor. Some of the principal causes may 
be enumerated as follows: 

A leak or crack in the pipe between the car- 
bureter and the admission - valve chamber — 
Partially or entirely close the air inlet to the car- 
bureter, then try and obtain an explosion from 
the motor. If it should start, the trouble is 
probably located and the admission -pipe should 
be closely inspected for leaks or cracks. 

Not enough gasoline — Proceed as above and 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 77 

if the motor starts, the nozzle in the mixing- 
chamber of the carbureter should be removed and 
the opening cleaned by passing a ^^^re through it, 
the needle-valve opening should be ti-eated in a 
like manner. 

Too much gasoline — Shut off the gasoline 
supply at the tank and crank the motor. If the 
motor starts, the trouble is located and the gaso- 
line supply should be regulated, by throttling at 
the supply tank, or if possible by replacing the 
nozzle with one having a smaller opening. 

Dirt in the gasoline — When filling the gasoline 
tank always use a strainer- funnel: one that is 
fitted ^vith a wire-orau/e screen of very fine mesh. 
In the absence of a strainer-funnd, three or 
four layers of fine linen may be fitted inside an 
ordinary funnel. A piece of chamois skin also 
makes an excellent filtering medium. Never 
use the same funnel for both gasoline and 
water. 

Leak in the float — This may be from the fact 
that one of the soldered joints has opened, or 
minute perforations occurred, by corrosion 
due to the presence of foreign sul)stances in the 
gasoline. In either case the float will partially 
or wholly fill with gasoline and sink to the bottom 
of the float chamber, thus opening the needle- 
valve and flo(Kling the carbureter. The only 
remedv for this is a new float. 

Poor quahty of gasoline — This is generally 



78 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

indicated by a smoky exhaust with a disagreeable 
odor, the motor will misfire occasionally and not 
develop its full power. Gasoline should always 
be tested with a densimeter when its quality is 
in doubt and if it does not show at least 76 
degrees it should be rejected. In the absence 
of a testing outfit, a handy and fairly reliable 
method of testing the fuel is to pour a little of 
the doubtful gasoline on the palm of the hand. 
If the gasoline evaporates rapidly and leaves 
the hand dry and clean, it may be safely used, 
but if it evaporates slowly and leaves a greasy 
deposit on the hand, its use should be avoided. 

Water in the carbureter — All gasoline contains 
a slight percentage of water, which, being heavier 
than the more volatile liquid, settles to the bottom 
of the gasoline tank and eventually finds its way 
to the carbureter. This generally happens after 
a car has been standing for some days and not in 
use. The gasoline supply should be shut oflF at 
the tank and the carbureter emptied by opening 
the pet-cock usually provided for this purpose at 
the bottom of the float chamber. 

Stale gasoline — The gasoline in the float 
chamber of the carbureter will lose its strength if 
the car has been standing for some time not in 
use — Shut off the gasoline supply at the tank and 
then empty the float chamber by means of the 
pet-cock which is usually provided for this pur- 
pose. After the float chamber is emptied, close 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 79 

the pet-cock and turn on the gasoline supply at 
the tank. 

Cold weather — Saturate a piece of waste with 
some fresh gasoline and insert it in the air-inlet 
of the carbureter —In extremely cold weather it 
may be necessary to warm the carbureter and 
admission-pipe by pouring boiling water over 
them, but on any account do not Start a bonfire 
under the carbureter. 

Water in the gasoline — Pour a small quantity 
of the gasoline on a smooth, unpainted metal 
surface, the water will separate from the gasoline 
and collect in small globules, unless the water 
has been purposely combined with the gasoline 
by the use of some chemical, at the hands of an 
unscrupulous dealer — If this is suspected, a small 
quantity of the gasoline when ignited will bum 
slowly with a yellowish flame. 

Starting crank not turned fast enough — Always 
remember that a few quick turns of the crank 
will be more likelv to start the motor than ten 
minutes of slow pumping, t^ 

Carbureters, Tjrpes of. Carbureters for gaso- 
line motors are of three types : surface carburetcTs, 
in which the air supply is mixed directly with 
gasoline vapor to form an explosive mixture* — 
spray or jet float-feed carbureters, which, by means 
of a float, maintain a constant level in the gasoline 
receptacle and mixing valves, in which the gasoline 
outlet is opened by means of an air valve. 



80 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

The surface carbureter is at the present time 
almost obsolete, being used only on one or two 
motor-bicycles of European make. The rapid 
evaporation of the vapor in the surface carbureter, 
due to the suction of the motor-piston, causes the 
gasoline after a short time to become thick and 
syrupy, and if some external source of heat is not 
supplied to assist in the evaporation it will cease 
altogether. While the surface carbureter is the 
most economical of the three forms, it is very 
irregular and erratic in its action and requires 
constant manipulation of the air and gasoline 
vapor cocks to insure at all times an explosive 
mixture of uniform (|uality. The float-feed form 
of carbureter consists of two principal parts: a 
gasoline receptacle which contains a hollow metal 
or a cork float, suitably arranged to control the 
supply of gasoline from the tank or reservoir, and 
a tul)e or pipe in which is located a jet or nozzle 
in comnmnication with the gasoline receptacle — 
this tube or pipe is called the mixing chamber. 
I'he gasoline level is maintained about one-six- 
teenth of an inch below the opening in the jet in 
the mixing chamber. The inductive action of 
the motor-piston creates a partial vacuum in the 
pipe leading from the mixing chamber of the 
carbureter to the motor, thereby causing the 
gasoline to flow from the jet and mixing with 
the air supply, to be drawn into the cylinder 
of the motor in the form of an explosive mixture. 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



81 



Cardan Joint— See Universal Joints. 

Chain, Roller. After a chain has been run 
about 2,500 to 3,000 car miles remove it and 
thoroughly clean by immersing first in hot water 
and then in gasoline. Afterwards it should be 
boiled in mutton tallow for at least one-half 
hour. The object of boiling the chain in mutton 
tallow is two-fold, first it gets the grease into a 
fluid state so that it will enter between the rollers 
and contact-surfaces of the pins and links and 
when cold it will exclude all dust or grit from 
entering therein, besides it forms an excellent 
lubricant between the rolling surfaces. 

The dimensions and strength of standard 
sizes of roller chain are given in Table No. 9. 

Table No. 9. 
Dimensions and Strength of Roller Chain. 



Pitch of 

Chain In 

Inches. 


Diameter of 

Roller in 

Inches. 


Width of 1 Breaking j 
Chain in i Stress in 
Inches. \ Pounds. 

1 


1 
U 


i 


i & i 

f &} 


5,000 
6,500 
9,000 



Change-speed Gear — See Power Transmission 
Devices. 

Channel-iron — See Structural Shapes. 

Chassis. The word chassis since its adoption 
into the English language is taken to mean the 
frame, springs, wheels, transmission and in fact 



82 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

all mechanism except the automobile body. In 
its original French it does not mean all this, but 
is strictly restricted to mean the frame, or the 
frame and springs-see Running Geai«. 

Chauffeur. This term when literally trans- 
lated means the stoker or fireman of a boiler. 
The use of the word has been extended to the 
operator of a motor car, but does not usually refer 
to the paid driver, who is generally known as the 
mecanicien or mechanic. 

Circuit-breaker. A circuit-breaker is a device 
consisting of either a solenoid or an electromagnet 
which acts automatically to break the circuit of 
a storage battery charging plant, when a condition 
of cither too low or too high voltage exists. 

Circulating Pump— See Pumps. 

Circumferences of Circles — See Table No. 6 — 

Areas and circumferences of circles. 

Clutches, Friction — See Power Transmission 
Devices. 

Clutch Troubles. Some of the troubles to 
which a clutch may give rise are: 

Slipj)age of the contact surfaces of the driving 
and driven members of a clutch, caused by oil or 
grease getting between the contact surfaces, or 
need of adjustment to take up wear or lost motion 
in the w^orking parts — A little Fuller's earth or 
French chalk w411 generally cure the slippage if 
one of the contact surfaces is of leather. If both 
are metal, a dose of kerosene will in most cases 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 83 

remove the grease, but on no account use gaso- 
line for this purpose. If the slippage is caused 
by need of adjustment, so adjust the contact 
surface of the driving or driven member that the 
contact surfaces will be closer together than 
formerly, when apart. 

Clutches of the disk or side-drive form usually 
have the contact surface of the driving member 
of vulcanized fiber. When badly worn or burnt 
from too sudden application of the clutch engag- 
ing mechanism, slippage will occur, the only 
remedy for which is new fiber pads. 

Clutches of any form, having the contact sur- 
face of one of the members leather-covered, which 
exhibit a tendency to take hold too suddenly, 
may be remedied by treating the leather surface 
to a generous application of glycerine or castor oil. 

K a cone-friction clutch should stick or seize 
and all ordinary methods fail to loosen it, with 
the high speed gear in mesh, push the car back- 
ward and forward several- times. This will 
generally free the clutch. 

The replacing of the leather on the male 
member of a cone-friction clutch of the flywheel 
type is usually a tedious process and one that 
should be handled by an expert. Owing to the 
necessity of removing the male member of the 
clutch from the car, this may in some cases 
require the complete removal, or at least partial 
disconnection of the transmission gear. 



84 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

Always get the new leather from the maker of 
the car and if possible keep one on hand, to avoid 
delay when the renewal of the leather becomes a 
necessity. 

Coils — See Electrical Ignition, also Induction 
Coil. 

Combustion Chamber. Thai part of an explo- 
sive motor in which the gases are compressed and 
then fired, usually by an electric spark, is known 
as the combustion chamber. The interior of the 
combustion chamber should be as smooth as 
possible and kept free from soot or hard carbon 
deposits such as are induced by excessive lubrica- 
tion or the use of too rich an explosive mixture. 

It will be found to be no small task in design- 
ing an explosive motor with the usual form of 
valve construction and operation, to keep the 
combustion chamber do^^^l to the required dimen- 
sions and at the same time have it free from 
bends or ccmtracted passages between the com- 
bustion space and the valve chamber. 

Many attempts have been made to obviate this 
difficnltv bv niakinij the combustion chamber 
simply a straight extension or continuation of the 
cylinder. In this manner both the admission and 
exhaust-valves can be placed in the cylinder itself 
and an ideal combustion space secured. This 
plan has, however, certain disadvantages^ from 
the fact that it not only lengthens the motor» but 
requires a more complicated form of valve operat- 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK sr, 

ing mechanism tnan if the valve chamber were at 
the side of the cylinder as is usual. 

Combustion Chamber, Dimensions of. If it 

is desired to ascertain the cubic contents or 
dimensions of the combustion chamber of an 
existing motor, they may be found by filling the 
combustion space with water, then obtaining the 
weight of the water in ounces, which multiplied 
by 1.72 will give the capacity of the chamber in 
cubic inches. If a motor is to be designed with 
a given bore and stroke, the first thing to do is 
to decide on the amount of clearance or combus- 
tion space at the end of the cylinder for the gases 
to occupy after compression. 

If the combustion space could be made as a 
continuation or extension of the cylinder bore, it 
would be an easy matter to determine the required 
clearance, as it would simply l)e some fraction of 
the total piston stroke. 

But as the general design of a combustion 
chamber deviates widely from a plain section or 
length of a cylinder as above described, being in 
some cases flat oval, elliptical, semi-spherical and 
even rectangular in cross section, some other 
method must be used to calculate the re(|uired 
clearance. 

To do this correctly the contents of the com- 
bustion chamber in cubic inches must first be 
ascertained, and then apportioned between the 
valve chamber or chambers and the clearance 



86 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

proper which lies directly behind the piston 
head. 

To find the cubic contents of a combustion 
chamber when the degree of compression in 
atmospheres is known: Let S be the stroke of 
the piston in inches and A the area of the cylinder 
in square inches. If N be the number of atmos- 
pheres compression and C the required contents 
of the combustion chamber in cubic inches, then 

SX.\_ 

(N-1) 

Example: Find the cubic contents of the 
combustion chamber for a motor of 4-inch bore 
and 5-inch stroke with 4 atmospheres compression. 

Answer: Five multiplied by 12.56 equals 
62.83, which divided by 3 gives 20.94 as the 
number of cubic inches required. 

Commutators, Care of. Commutators with a 
make and break form of contact-maker, should 
have the platinum contacts cleaned at least once 
a week, with a small piece of fine sandpaper or 
emery cloth. 

Commutators having a rotary wiping form of 
contact, should have the brass or copper segment 
thoroughly cleaned in the manner just described, 
and all grease or dirt removed from the fiber 
portion of the commutator. 

All thumb or lock-nuts and adjusting screws 
should be carefully gone over, and the condition 
of the wiring from the battery and coils examined 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



87 



Fig 33 



very closely. Ten minutes spent in this manner 
once a week may save long delays and much 
laborious work at some future time. 

Commutators, Forms of. The commutator 

of the ignition system of a multi-cylinder gasoline 
motor has a three-fold use: To switch the 
battery current in and out of the electrical circuit 
at the proper time — To transfer the battery 
current successively from one coil to another — 
To vary the point or time of ignition of the explo- 
sive charge in the motor cylinder. 

The commutator shown in Figure 33 is for a 
four-cylinder motor and is designed for use with 
induction coils without 
vibrators, which are 
known as single-jump 
spark coils. The studs of 
the screws A and springs 
B are carried by insulated 
bushings located in the 
back of the commutator 
case. The nose of the cam 
C successively engages 

with the springs, causing them in turn to make 
contact with their respective screws. The bat- 
tery and coil circuit is completed through the 
screws A, and a ground to the cam C, by means of 
the springs B, when in contact with their respec- 
tive screws and the cam. 

This device is said to cause a good spark at 




COMMUTATOR 



88 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 




COMMUTATOR 



the plug on account of the quick break between 
the spring and the screw, the electrical circuit 
being broken the instant the spring leaves the 

screw and before the cam 
has allowed the spring to 
resume its normal posi- 
tion. This form of com- 
mutator cannot be short- 
circuited bv oil or dirt 
getting between the 
spring and the screw, as 
I lie spring B only forms 
a part of the electrical 
circuit when in contact with both the cam C and 
the screw A. 

Another form of commutator for a four-cylinder 
motor is illustrated in Figure 34, which has a 
rotary spring contact-maker A, which engages 
su(*f.'essively with the heads B of the screws C. 
'i'lie screws are spaced equidistant around the 
fiber ring D, which also forms the case of the 
commutator and are held in position by the lock- 
nuts E. The spring contact-maker A is attached 
to a hub F on the cam shaft of the motor. The 
time or point of ignition may be varied by 
moving the commutator case about its axis by 
means of a rod attiichcd to the nrm G. 

Figure 3.) shows two commutators of very 
similar construction. The one at the left in the 
drawinii: is for a two-cvlindor motor and has 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



89 



flat spring-steel contact-makers. The commu- 
tator sho^Ti at the right of the drawing is for 
a four-cylinder motor and instead of having flat 
spring contact- makers, it has either carbon or 
copper contact-brushes, which are held against 
the commutator by short coil springs in the insu- 
lated bushings located around the periphery of 
the commutator case. The commutator is made 
of vulcanized fiber with a short brass or copper 





COMMUTATORS 



Fig. 35 



segment, which is grounded to the cam shaft as 
shown. 

The forms of commutators illustrated in the 
drawings may be constructed for use with a motor 
of any number of cylinders, by increasing or 
decreasing the number of contact-makers located 
around the commutator — see also Electric Motors. 

Compensating Joints. On account of the 

distortion of the frame or running gear of an 
automobile, due to unequal spring deflection and 
irregularities of the road surface, means should 



BBH 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



be provided to insure flexible joints or connections 
between the various rotating parts of the mechan- 
i-sm of a car. The device shown in Figure 36 is 
not. susceptible to any great amount of angular 
distortion, but will transmit power with a 
practically uniform velocity, with the axes of the 
shafts considerably out of alignment in vertical or 
horizontal parallel planes. 




Fig. 36 



COMPENSATING DEVICE 



The form of compensating joint shown in 
Figure 37 may be operated with the axes of the 
shafts at an angle to each other, or with the shafts 
out of alignment with each other in vertical or 
horizontal parallel planes and has quite a range 
of operation with either condition. Both forms 
of the device ref]uire to have bearings on either 
side, as shown, to insure their proper working. 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



91 



Compressed Air — See Air, Properties of. 

Compression, Advantages of. The compres- 
sion pressure of an explosive motor should be as 
high as is possible, without danger of reaching 
the degree of compression at which premature or 
self-ignition of the charge would occur. 

A high degree of compression is of great ad van- 



rfHB 



f . I I 



i^ — r 



"^^J 



rSID 




Fig. 37 







SD 




COMPENSATING JOINT 



tage, but it is not generally known that during 
compression there is a loss of heat from the gases 
to the walls of the motor cylinder. If the time 
or period of contact of the gases with the cylinder 
walls were less, the heat losses would be smaller. 
Hence the mean temperature of the gases during 
the compression stroke of the motor increases 
with the motor speed and consequently the gases 



92 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

ignite far more readily when the motor is running 
at a high rate of speed, than when running slowly 
or being operated by hand. 

The higher the compression, therefore, the 
quicker the ignition and consequent expansion of 
the gases take place, thereby causing them to 
attain a greater initial pressure, on account of 
the lesser heat losses through the cylinder walls. 
As it takes a certain length of time to dissipate 
or radiate a certain amount of heat, it follows as 
a natural sequence that the shorter the time 
occupied by the burning gases to attain their 
highest pressure, the smaller the heat losses by 
dissipation or radiation. The principal gain by 
the use of high compression is secured from the 
fact that the motor may be run at a greater 
number of revolutions per minute, thus having 
more working strokes or power impulses and 
hence greater power, than if using a lower degree 
of compression and consequently slower speed. 

Compression, How to Calculate. The com- 
pression in atmospheres of a motor may be readily 
found by dividing the cubic contents of the piston 
displacement by the cubic contents of the com- 
bustion chamber in cubic inches, and then adding 
one to the result. 

To ascertain the compression in atmospheres 
of a motor, when the cubic contents of the com- 
bustion chamber are known : I^et S be the stroke 
of the piston in inches and A the area of the 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 03 

cylinder in square inches. If C be the contents 
of the combustion chamber in cubic inches and 
N the required compression in atmospheres, then 



=m 



Example: Find the compression in atmos- 
pheres of a motor of 4-inch bore and 6-inch stroke, 
whose combustion chamber has a capacity of 
18 cubic inches. 

Answer: Six multiplied by 12.56 equals 75.36, 
which divided by 18 gives 4.19, and 4.19 plus 1 
equals 5.19, or the compression in atmospheres 
required. 

If it is desired to ascertain the compression in 
atmospheres of a motor, the combustion chamber 
of which is of such shape that its dimensions 
cannot be accurately calculated , its cubic contents 
may be found by filling the combustion chamber 
with water, and after removing the water, ascer- 
taining its weight in ounces, and then multiplying 
the result by 1.72. This gives the capacity of 
the combustion chamber in cubic inches. The 
compression of the motor can then be readily 
Calculated from the formula given herewith — see 
also Air, Properties of Compressed. 

Compression, How to Test for Leaks in. 

To discover if there are any leaks in the com- 
pression of a gasoline motor, a small pressure 
gauge reading up to 75 pounds should be fitti 



94 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

into the spark plug opening in the combustion 
chamber by means of a reducing bushing. When 
turning the starting crank of the motor slowly 
the gauge should indicate at least 60 pounds per 
square inch if the compression is in good 
condition. 

To test for leaks, fill a small oil can with 
soapy water and squirt round every joint where 
there may be a possible chance for leakage. Get 
an assistant to turn the crank and watch for 
bubbles at the joints. 

If the joints are all tight, next examine the 
condition of the admission and exhaust-valves 
and if either of them needs regrinding, it should 
be done, first with fine emery powder and oil, 
then finished with tripoli and water. 

When the valves have been ground to a perfect 
fit, if the compression still leaks, the piston rings 
should be examined, as the trouble will be found 
to be with them — see Piston Rings. 

Condenser, Use of. A condenser is used in 
connection with a Rumkorff or jump-spark form 
of induction coil to take up or absorb the static 
charge of electricity, occasioned by the self- 
induction or electrical reaction in the primary 
winding of the coil upon the breaking of the bat- 
tery circuit by the interrupter or vibrator. This 
static charge is given up or discharged into the 
primary winding of the coil along with the battery 
current upon the closing of the circuit, thus 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 95 

intensif}dng the action of the secondary winding 
of the coil in a great degree. 

By absorbing the static charge of electricity 
the condenser helps to decrease the spark or 
arc between the platinum contact points of 
the . interrupter or vibrator, thereby lengthening 
the life of the platinum contacts by reducing the 
erosive action of the induced current spark. A 
jump-spark coil very often refuses to work prop- 
erly on account of the condenser connections 
having become loose — see Electrical Ignition. 

Gonstraction of a Gasoline Motor — See Gaso- 
line Motor Construction. 

Contact-breaker. Some forms of high speed 
gasoline motors with an induction coil of the 
single- jump-spark type, have a device known as 
a contact-breaker to open or break the electric 
circuit of the battery and coil, at the proper time 
for the passage of the arc or spark at the points 
of the spark plug. On account of the extremely 
high speed of such motors, and to allow time for 
the magnetism or magnetic flux in the core of the 
coil to attain a density sufficient to produce a 
good spark at the plug points, it is found necessary 
to keep the battery and coil in a closed circuit, 
except during the brief interval necessary for the 
passage of the spark at the plug points. 

Figure 38 illustrates one form of contact- 
breaker. The left-hand end of the double lever 
b kept in contact with the lower end of the 



96 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 




insulated pin, by means of a short spring 
immediately below it. When the nose of the 
cam engages with the roller in the fork or jaw at 

the right-hand 
end of the 
double lever, in- 
stant separation 
of the nose of 
the insulated pin 
and the left-hand 
end of the 
double lever 
takes place, 
breaking the 
electric circuit and causing a spark to occur at 
the points of the spark plug. 

The electric circuit of the battery and coil is 
completed by one wire being connected with the 
lock-nuts on the upper end of the insulated pin 
and the other wire grounded on the case of the 
contact-breaker. 

Contact-maker. One of the simplest methods 
of electric ignition for explosive motor use is that 
known as the singlc-junip-spark system, with 
which a plain induction coil without a vibrator or 
trembler is used. The secondary spark is pro- 
duced by means of a mechanical device operated 
by the cam shaft of the motor. The device^, 
illustrated and which are known as contact- 
makers, cause a spark to arc or jump between 



THE AUTOMOBlLfc: HAND-BOOK 



the points of the spark plug in the combustion 
chamber of the motor. 

Figure 39 shows one form of contact-maker. 
The case A is usually attached to the gear box of 
the motor. Attached to 
a boss on the inside and 
near the upper end of the 
case is the trembler B, 
consisting of a flat steel 
spring with a nose at its 
lower end. Near the 
center of the spring b a 
platinum contact - point 
C. On the opposite side 
of the case is a bushing 
with insulation E, carry- 
ing the screw D, which is so adjusted that it docs 
not quite contact with the platinum point C of 
the trembler. As the cam F revolves in the 
direction indicated by the arrow, it comes in 
contact with the nose of the trembler B, and 
pushes the platinum point C still further away 
from the screw D. Shortly before the cam has 
arrived at- the position shown in the drawing, it 
has released the nose of the trembler, allowinf; 
it to fall; this action produces a vibrating effect, 
opening and closing the circuit repeatedly and 
with great rapidity, between the point C and 
screw D. 

This is supposed to cause a stream or succession 




9S 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



Fig. 40 



of sparks to occur between the plug points in the 
combustion chamber of the motor. In practice, 
however, and at a high rate of speed, only a 
single spark occurs. 

Another form of contact-maker is shown in 
Figure 40. The trembler B has a small roller 

upon its lower end which 
at the proper time is 
engaged by the nose of 
the cam F. The screw 
D is carried in a metal 
block I, which is at- 
tached to the back of the 
case A by suitable insu- 
lating bushings E. The 
screw H in the insu- 
lated bushing at G, 
makes the electrical con- 
nection from the coil 
iind battery, through the 
block I and screw D, to 
the platinum contact C on the trembler B. The 
operation of this device is precisely the same 
as that of the one shown in Figure 39. 

Coupling, Flexible— See Universal Joints. 
Current, Commutation of Secondary. There 

have been numerous devices made for this pur- 
pose, but it is almost an impossible proposition 
to switch the secondary current properly on 
account of its great intensity. It will arc around 




CONTACT MAKER 



THE ArTOMORlLE IIAXD-HOOK 



\)\) 



almost any forn) (^f comnnitator \\m\ couid Ur 
devised of practical working diinonsions. 

Current, Direction of. The direction of a 

current of electricity flowing in a wirc^ may he 
readily ascertained l)y reference to Figure 41. 
Place an onlinary pocket compass al)ove the 
wire and in the position shown. If the needle 
points to the North pole of the com[)ass, tlu* 



r 



Fig 41 



+ «^l 




POLE FINDER 



current will be flowing in the wire in the direct ioii 
indicated 1)V the arrow in the upper view, and 
the end at the left will he the Positive ]>()le or 
terminal of the wire. If on the other hand the 
needle points to the South pole of the compass, 
the current will be flowing in the opposite direc- 
tion as indicated bv the arrow in the lower view 
in the drawing, and the end at the* left will in 
this ease be the Negative pole or terminal of the 
wire — see also Polarity. 



100 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

Cylinder-jacket — See Water-jackets. 
Cylinder, Method of Boring a. A good way 

to bore a cylinder is to make a boring-bar to fit 
in the drill socket of a back-geared drill press 
and a brass or phosphor bronze bushing to fit in 
the center hole of the table of the drill press. 
The cylinder can be clamped to the table of the 
drill press by its flange and bored out with a cutter 
set in the boring bar. Not less than three, and 
preferably four cuts, should be taken to make a 
good job. A mandril should then be made with 
two flanged hubs, one of which should be fastened 
to the mandril and the other turned slightly taper 
so as to make a snug fit in the cylinder bore 
when in place. The ends of the cylinder can 
then be finished on the mandril and a perfect job 
will be the result. In case a back-geared drill 
press is not handy the cylinder can be clamped 
to the carriage of the lathe, bored out with a 
bar in the lathe centers and the ends finished in 
the manner above described, but it is a much 
slower job than in a drill press. The cutter for 
the bar should be made from a piece of round 
tool steel not less than five-eighths of an inch 
diameter. It can then be readily adjusted to 
any desired angle to obtain the best cutting 
effect. 

Cylinder, Scratched — See Scratched Cylinder. 

Decimal Fractions of an Inch. See Table 
No. 10. 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



101 



Table No. 10. 

Decimals op an Inch for Each ^. 



Ads. 


Decimal 


Fraction 


Ads. 


Decimal 


Fraction 


1 


.03125 




17 


.53125 




2 


.0625 


1-16 


18 


.5625 


9-16 


3 


.09375 




19 


. 59375 




4 


.125 


1-8 


20 


.625 


5-8 


5 


. 15625 




21 


. 65625 




6 


.1875 


3-16 


22 


.6875 


11-16 


7 


. 21875 




23 


.71875 




8 


.25 


1-4 


24 


.75 


3-4 


9 


.28125 




25 


.78125 




10 


.3125 


5-16 














26 


.8125 


13-16 


11 


.34375 




27 


. 84375 




12 


.375 


3-8 


28 


.875 


7-8 


13 


. 40625 




29 


. 90625 




14 


.4375 


7-16 


30 


.9375 


15-16 


15 


. 46875 




31 


. 96875 




16 


.5 


1-2 


32 


1. 


1 



Densimeter, Use of. The scale generally in 
use for indicating the densities of liquids is that 
of Baume. On this scale the zero point cor- 
responds to the density of a solution of salt of 
specified proportions, while 10 degrees corresponds 
to the density of distilled water at a specified 
temperature. 

Figure 42 shows the form of densimeter 
generally used for testing gasoline. 

Gasoline for explosive motor use should test at 
least 76 degrees Baume. 

Deposit of Carbon in Combustion Chamber — 
See Carbon, Deposit of. 



102 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



Diagram, Indicator — Sec Indicator Diagrams. 
Diagram, Wiring, for a Single Cylinder 
Motor. Diagram No. 2 shows a method of 
wiring for a single cyhndcr 
motor, using two sets of dry 
batteries — a storage battery 
and a set of dry batteries — 
or a set of dry batteries and 
a generator. By moving the 
switch finger, either the genera- 
tor or the battery may be used 
as desired, or both cut out. 

Differentia! Gear — See 
Power Transmission Devices. 
Don'ts. In the first place 
DENSIMETER I don't forget to ascertain the 
fact that the ignition mechan- 
ism is retarded before cranking the motor. Many a 
sprained wrist and not a few cases of broken 
heads or arras have been caused by the neglect of 
this simple precaution. It is a good plan to have 
the ignition-contro! spring so actuated that in its 
normal position it is always retarded. 

If the motor should not happen to start the 
first time, don't forget to keep out of the way of 
the crank when the motor is stopping. It might 
take a turn backwards and take the crank with it. 
Don't foi^et to close the battery switch before 
starting the motor. 

Don't allow the motor to stand in such a 



THE AUTOMOBILK HAN'D-BOUK 



m 




IM 


^ 




1 


< x- -- " 






z ^/ \ < 
















.^ 


V y ^ 


UJ 








z 


^- — ^^ 


q: 










u 


" fil, " 


q: 




UJ 

>- 
q: 






■U^l c^ 


z 


(»l 








rs;-^ 




8 

UJ 


J 


in 

UJ 

q: 

UJ 

H 


< 

Q. 






® (i> 

J 


_J 






< 













m 










U 






(i)+ 










q: 


















< 










_^ 




















M 






I 






> 






UJ 

1- 


Z 
< 






/ 


/ ^ \ 


5 


< 


M»lu 


m 


Q 


X 


^ n / 




) 1 




z 


u 


V^ 9^ 


*-! 


t — 




5 




£ 


in 




^ 



104 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

position that with the battery connected, the 
vibrator of the spark coil will work. It is almost 
the same as a short-circuit, and will run down 
the battery rapidly. 

Don't use a match or a small torch to inspect 
the carbureter. It sometimes leads to unex- 
pected results. 

Don't forget to fill the gasoline tank before 
starting. 

Don't smoke while filling the gasoline tank. 

Don't take out all the spark plugs when there 
is nothing the matter, except that there is no 
gasoline in the tank. 

Don't forget to always have an extra spark 
plug on the car. 

Don't allow the motor to race or run fast when 
out of gear. If the car is to be stopped for a 
few minutes, without stopping the motor, retard 
the ignition and also throttle the charge, so that 
the motor will run as slowly as possible. 

Don't fill the gasoline tank too full, leave an 
air space at the top or the gasoline will not flow 
readily. 

Don't have any open hole in the gasoline 
tank. When the car is washed water may run 
in this hole, mix with the gasoline and cause 
trouble. 

Don't put grease in the crank case of the 
motor, it will clog up the oil holes and prevent 
the oil from circulating. 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 105 

Don't fill the gasoline tank by lamp or candle 
light, something unexpected may happen. 

Don't keep on running when an unusual noise 
is heard about the car, stop and find out what 
it is. 

Don't start or stop too suddenly, something 
may break. 

Don't pour gasoline over the hands and then 
rub them together. That rubs the dirt into the 
skin. The proper way to do is to saturate a 
towel with gasoUne and then wipe the dirt off. 

Don't forget to examine the steering gear 
frequently. 

Don't fail to examine the pipe between the 
carbureter and the admission-valve occasionally. 
The pipe connections sometimes get loose and 
allow air to enter and weaken the mixture. 

Don't forget to see that there is plenty of water 
and gasoline in the tanks. 

Don't fail to clean the motor and all the wear- 
ing parts of the car occasionally. 

Don't forget to oil every part of the motor 
where there is any friction, except the valve 

stems. 

Don't spill the gasoline on clothing and then 
strike a match to light a pipe, some one may be 
sorry afterwards. 

Don't go out for a run without a complete 
equipment of tools, extra parts, gasoline, and tire 
repair outfit, or a late return may be expected. 



!06 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

Don't let a willing bystander fill up the gasoline 
tank with water. 

Don't leave the water in the circulating system 
on a frosty night, except with 40 per cent of 
glycerine in it, and never when below zero. 

Don't start away with the brake on and 
wonder why the motor is not working well, and 
in conclusion. 

Don't let the starting handle fly off and hit 
somebody on the chin. /^ 

Driving-wheels, Large versus Small. The 

larger the wheels, the less power should be 
required to drive a car. Theory shows that the 
road resistance decreases in proportion as the 
wheel diameter gets larger. The result of ex- 
periments to verify this do not show quite such 
favorable results, but a gain almost in proportion 
to the scjuare root of the wheel diameter has been 
obtained. The principal reasons why large 
wheels are not more used arc as follows: 

The center of gravity of the car is raised and 
mak^s the car less stable in turning comers. 
They arc more expensive and more liable to 
injury than wheels of smaller diameter. They 
increase the cost of the tires enormously. They 
make access to the seats more difficult on account 
of the increased height of the car. 

Dry Batteries —See Batteries, Dry and 
Primary. 

Dynamo — See Generator. 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 107 

Dynamometer. A dynamometer is a form of 
equalizing gear which is attached between a source 
of power and a piece of machinery when it is 
desired to ascertain the power necessary to operate 
the aforesaid machinery with a given rate of speed. 

Efficiency, Electrical — See Electrical Horse- 
power. 

Efficiency of a Gasoline Motor. In text- 
books the efficiency of a motor is usually con- 
sidered as the relation between the heat-units 
consumed by the motor and the work or energy 
in foot-pounds given out by it. If the heat-units 
(which are measured by the quantity of fuel 
supplied to the motor) be large compared to the 
work or energy given out by the motor, its 
efficiency is small. 

At the present time the quantity of liquid fuel 
consumed by an explosive motor for automobile 
use is of secondary importance. The fuel econ- 
omy of a motor is important, but it does not 
usually occupy the first place in automobile 
construction. The consideration of primary 
importance is to obtain the maximum amount of 
power from a motor of minimum weight. As 
only about one-fiftli of the heat-units consumed 
by an explosive motor are utilized or given up in 
the form of work or energy, there is consequently 
room for great improvement. 

The power for weight efficiency of a motor 
increases almost in proportion to the speed with 



lOS THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

high speed explosive motors, but the fuel efficiency 
of a motor decreases with the speed beyond 
certain limitations. 

Efficiency of Power Transmission — See 

Transmission of Power. 

Electrical ChaJ^^ing Outfits— See Batteries, 

Drj- and Primar\', Battery Charging Outfit and 
Storage Battery Chaiging. 

Electrical Horsepower. One electrical horse- 
power is equal to the current in amperes multi- 
plied by the electro-motive force or voltage of 
the circuit and divided bv 746. 

Ix*t C be the current in amperes and E the 
voltage of the circuit. If E. H. P be the required 
electrical horsejwwer, then 

746 

In practice with motors of small power, 1,000 
watts arc necessary to deliver one mechanical or 
brake horsepower at the driving shaft of the motor. 

If the actual or bnike horsepower of an electric 
motor be known, the efficiency of the motor 
mav be readilv found bv the following formula: 

If E be the voltage i>f the circuit and C the 
current in ampores consuinctl by the motor, let 
B. H. P be the *^ ** horsepower of the motor 
and e the e^ he motor, then 

^ PX746 
XC 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



109 



Table No. 11 gives the electrical horsepower 
of motors with voltage from 20 to 100 volts, and 
current strengths from 10 to 80 amperes. 

The mechanical efficiency of a motor may be 
found by use of the table as follows: 

Example: Required the mechanical efficiency 
of a 40- volt, 60-ampere motor, which is rated by 
its maker as of 3.25 horsepower — the motor 
when under full load using 80 amperes. 

Answer: Reference to the column in the table 
corresponding to 40 volts and 60 amperes gives 
3.22, while the 80 ampere column gives 4.29. 
Then 3. 22 divided by 4.29 gives 0.75, or 75 per 
cent, as the mechanical efficiency of the motor. 



Table Xo. 11. 
Electrical HoRSEPowEFt of Mr/rous. 





Current in 


Arr.pen;H, 


Volt- 
age. 
























10 


20 


.30 


40 
1 07 


r/) 


00 


20 


.29 


.54 


.79 


I 01 


40 


.54 


1.07 


1.61 


2 n 


2 6H 


.3 22 


60 


.79 


1.61 


2.41 


.3 22 


\ 02 


\ H2 


80 


1.07 


2.14 


.3.22 


4 . 29 


5 .30 


1.3 


100 


1.34 


2.68 4.02 

r 
1 


5 .30 


70 


7 'H 



I 



H>, 



'/ 
'/ 



ir, 
7 . r/) 



Hf) 



2 H 

4 2'.f 

4.3 

>, '/< 



Electrical Ignition. 'Vhcrc urc, fwo ut*'^)tfA^. 

of producing an electric spark Vtr ij/nition pur- 
poses: The first, by mcMu-, of an ttifinf^tou * o\\ 
which has only a .single wiri'!inp^, 'ornj/'/^/J '/f a 
few layers of iasulat^^l ^^-opj^^-r v/jr*- '/( l;»r/<' ^i//!. 



110 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

wound upon a bundle of soft iron wires, known 
as the core. The second, by the use of an induc- 
tion coil with a double winding upon its core. 
The inner winding being composed of a few 
layers of insulated wire of large size, as in the 
coil just described, and an outer winding consist- 
ing of a great many layers of very small insulated 
copper wire, in fact, several thousand feet in 
length. 

The coil first described is known as a primary 
spark coil, from the fact that the spark or arc 
is produced by the direct efiPect of the battery or 
generator current flowing in the coil. This form 
of spark will not arc or jump across a space 
between two points, but simply occurs between 
the contact points on the breaking of the contact. 

The second form of induction coil is commonly 
known as a secondary spark coil, because the 
arc or spark is produced in the secondary wind- 
ing of the coil, and will jump or arc across a 
space between two fixed points, without the points 
first coming in contact. 

Induction Coil. Induction is the process by 
which a body having electrical or magnetic prop- 
erties calls forth similar properties in a neighbor- 
ing body without direct contact. This property 
is known as self-induction and is caused by the 
reaction of difTcrcnt parts of the same circuit 
upon one another, due to variations in distance 
pr current strength. The current produced by an 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



111 



induction coil has a very high electro-motive force 
and hence great power of overcoming resistance. 

The average user of an automobile is well 
aware that without the battery and the spark coil 
the motor would not operate. He has learned 
that, when the spark fails, there are certain 
forms to be gone through to ascertain the cause 
of trouble, but as there are other diflBculties, it is 
desirable that more should be known of this im- 
portant subject. 

If a current of electricity be caused to flow 
through a straight conductor forming a part of a 
closed electric circuit, lines of force, commonly 
called magnetic whirls or waves, are induced in 
the air and rotate around the conductor. 

If the current of electricity be flowing in the 
circuit and through the straight conductor from 
right to left, as 
shown in the up- 
per view in Figure 
43, the lines of 
force or magnetic 
whirls will rotate 



Fig. 43 



» / 



V 



-rt- 



* » 

/ 4 



*--^§'-®-(j^-(^^ 



A 
J 



SWITCH - + BATTERY 



-ir 



/" 



'~*^ 



/ \ 



N 






around the con- 
ductor from left to 
right, or in the 
direction of the 
hands of a clock. 
On the other hand, if the conditions be reversed 
and the current flows from left to right the lines 



SWITCH + -BATTERY 
INDUCTION COIL 



112 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

of force or magnetic whirls will rotate from right 
to left, as shown in the lower view in Figure 43. 
The direction of rotation of these lines of force 
or magnetic whirls may be positively determined 
by the use of a galvanometer, an electric testing 
instrument having a needle similar in appearance 
to that of an ordinary compass. Upon placing 
this instrument in the path of the lines of force 
and making and breaking the battery circuit by 
means of the switch, the needle of the galvanoui- 
eter will be deflected from its zero point in the 
direction of the rotation of the lines of force. If 
the direction of the flow of the electric current 
through the circuit be changed by reversing the 
poles of the battery, the needle of the galvanom- 
eter will be deflected from its zero point in the 
opposite direction. Whether these lines of force 
or magnetic whirls rotate continuously around 
the wire has not been demonstrated. They 
rotate with sufficient force to be tested by the 
galvanometer only until the electric current in 
the closed circuit has reached its maximum value 
after closing the circuit: that is to say, only 
during the infinitesimal space of time required 
by the current to reach its full value or power. 

If, instead of a straight conductor, a loop of 
insulated wire, in the form of a circle, be utilized 
for the passage of the current, as at A and B in 
Figure 44, the lines of force will still rotate around 
the wire as shown, their direction being depend- 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



113 




ent on the direction of the electric current. If 
the electrical circuit be provided with a current 
reverser, or device for changing the battery con- 
nections in the circuit from positive to negative 
and vice versa, the lines of force can be made to 
rotate rapidly first in one direction and then in 
the other, as indi- 
cated in Figure 43. 
Suppose this 
loop of insulated 
wire be composed 
of a great number 
of turns, it then 
becomes a coil or 
closed helix, and 
as all the lines of 
force cannot pass 
between the turns 
of the electrical 
conductor forming 
this helix they 
must pass com- 
pletely thi'ough the helix instead of rotating 
around a single loop, as at A and B, Figure 44. 
K the current flows through the conductor in the 
direction indicated by the arrows, at C in Figure 
44, and over and around the coil in the direction 
shown, the Unes of force will flow through the 
coil towards the observer, and complete their path 
or circuit through the air, returning into the coil 





INDUCTION COIL 



J 



114 THE AUTOMOBILE HAXD-BOOK 

at the opposite end. If the current be reversed 
and flow around the coil in the direction of the 
hands of a clock, the Hnes of force will flow 
through the coil in the opposite direction, that is, 
away from the observer, as at D, Figure 44. 

This form of coil or closed helix may be 
designated as the primitive form of an electro- 
magnet. When forming part of a closed electiic 
circuit it possesses the property of magnetizing a 
bar of wrought iron placed within it. If a short 
round bar of wrought iron be placed a short dis- 
tance within the coil and the battery circuit be 
closed, the iron bar will, if the current is 
sufficiently strong, be sucked or drawn into the 
center of the coil, and a considerable effort will 
be required to withdraw it. 

The object of the bundle of soft iron wires, 
which form the core of any form of spark coil, is 
to increase the magnetic efiPect of the lines of force 
or magnetic flux, or rather to reduce the resistance 
to their passage through the coil. 

As the resistance of air to the flow of the lines 
of force is about 100,000 times greater than that 
of wrought iron, the introduction of ibe iron core 
into the coil increases its magnetic c^ect enor- 
mously. 

As has been previously stated, when a current 
of electricity flows through a conductor or wire 
forming a coil or closed helix, lines of force are 
induced and flow through, and also around the 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAXD-BOOK 115 

exterior of the coil. In a like manner, when the 
electric circuit is broken, the lines of forct^ 
suddenly reverse their direction, and travel 
through the coil with a tremendous velocity until 
they reach a state of neutralization. Durin*^ tlii^i 
reverse travel of the lines of forcre through the 
coil, a current of electricity is induced in the wind- 
ing of the coil, but in the opposite direction t* 
that in which the battery current was flowin;^. 
The effect of this induced current, wliicli i-. ol' 
far greater intensity or pressure than the iKitlcrv 
current wliich induced it, is to form an an- or 
spark at the breaking point in the cinnit. 

Primary Spark Coil. Fi<riire W> shows a 
vertical longitudinal section tliroii;^li an indiiclion 
coil of the form first described, and known a-, a 




A B c T -fl 

iiu:i;uiu:j:;/i:;!!;::i:;;;.J'i..m!i:!iiiii:f:;;:;i::iii:iiiiip*^ 

'■llll"'*T»f*»r'»;'"**)M"'"*l'" .ti.i.|«.i|iii.lil.iliH>li| 



T 



T- 



4-i.«.i .^ *i-,»i-. .. . «* . *-...* + ..*♦♦#•. f t , rrrrrrrTTTTTiTTiTrrtTTTTTTT 

.,<T-t"-;;; '; i::;*r;;;'!!t!;':":"'":;:;':;*'"l:': •"; i.ti.i.i.iii 




>AaMMAA«M«^ 



II' ■•fMM ■ 






WIPE SPARK COIL ^ Fig. 45 



wi])e or touch s])ark coil. It consists of two 
principal parts, a core, made of a bundle of soft 
iron wire, and a coil of wire around this core 
composed of from ,S to 5 layers of turns of insu- 
lated copper wire, varying in diameter from No. 
16 to No. 12, B. & S. Gauge, according to the 



116 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

battery conditions under which the coil has to 
operate. The iron core may vary from three- 
eighths of an inch in diameter and 6 inches long, 
to three-fourths of an inch in diameter, and 12 
to 15 inches long, depending upon the intensity 
and capacity of the spark required. Reference 
to the drawdng will show that the core A has upon 
its ends wood or fiber washers D. They may 
be square or round. Upon the portion of the 
core between the washers is a paper tube E, upon 
which the wire forming the primary wmding is 
wound. The ends of the wire forming the coil 
and shown - at P are connected to the binding 
posts or terminals indicated by the letter T, and 
located on top of the washers D. The wire B, 
forming the primary winding, is usually provided 
with an outer casing, as shown at C, to protect 
it from water and grease. 

The form of induction coil above described is 
generally used for ignition purposes on gas and 
gasoline motors fitted with a mechanical make 
and break form of spark, which is located within 
the combustion chamber of the motor itself. 

Secondary Spark Coil. Figure 46 shows the 
secondary or jump-spark form of coil. It is 
composed of an iron core and a primary winding 
similar to that described in conjunction with 
Figure 45, with the addition of an outer winding 
of many turns of fine wire. This wire, of very 
small size, is known as the secondary winding, 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK U7 




118 THL: automobile HANI) BOOK 

varying in diameter from No. 36 to No. 40. B. & 
S. Gauge, and in length from 5,000 to 10,000 feet. 
In the drawing the induction coil is shown 
equipped with an cleccro-magnet make and break 
or vibrator device, which is the form mostly used 
for ignition purposes. The other form, known 
as the phiin jump-spark coil, has a mechanically 
operated make and break device attached to the 
motor to operate the coil. 

The arc or spark produced at the breaking 
point of the electrical circuit in which the primary 
winding of the coil is connected is not utilized for 
ignition purposes in this type of coil. When the 
circuit is broken the sudden reaction or backward 
flow of the lines of force or magnetic flux in the 
iron core produce an induced current in the 
secondary winding, but in the opposite direction 
to that of the battery current. This induced 
current is of so much greater intensity and velocity 
than that induced in the primary winding by this 
same reaction, that the arc or spark induced in 
the secondary winding of the coil will jump across 
a space f oni one end of the wire to the other, 
varying]: from 1 inch to as nmch as 8 or 10 inches 
in length, dependent upon the length of wire 
in the secondarv circuit, the electro-motive force 

« 

of the batt(Ty and the fre(|uen(»y of the interrup- 
tions or number of times per minute ttie electric 
circuit is made and broken. 

In the drawing A is the core, B the primary 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 119 

winding and C the secondan\ The two coils are 
held in place upon the core by the washers D. 
The primary wire B is wound over a paper tube 
E, and the secondary wire C is insulated from the 
primary wire by a mica insulating tube F. The 
coil proper is enclosed in a wood case G. 

The terminals or binding posts on top of the 
case G are connected with the ends of the sec- 
ondary wire 1 and 2. The secondary terminals 
are plainly indicated by the letter S. In the base 
H of the coil case is the condenser J, an essential 
feature of this form of coil, which utilizes th(; 
induced primary current to produce a greater 
reactive energy in the secondary winding. 

At the right-liand end of the coil and outside 
the casing G is located the electro-magnetic 
vibrator or tremblintjj device, which automatically 
makes and breaks the [)riinary circuit. The end 
3 of the primary wire is connected with tlie con- 
tract screw K through the bracket L. The spring 
M, carried by the bracket N, with screw (), is 
connected with the terminal or binding post P, 
immediately beneath it, by the wire (i through the 
bracket N. The end 4 of the primary wire is con- 
nected with another terminal or binding post P, 
at the other end of the base of the coil. The con- 
denser J is connected across the contact points of 
the screw K and the spring M, by the wires 5 and 
6 and screws Q and X. The condenser is com - 
posed of a number of sheets of tinfoil V, laid 



120 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

between sheets of specially insulated paper I, with 
the opposite end of every alternate sheet of tinfoil 
projecting from the paper insulation, as shown. 
These projecting ends are connected together 
and by the wires 5 and 6 to the contact screw K 
and spring M, respectively, as previously de- 
scribed. 

When the coil is connected in or forms part of 
a closed electric circuit by means of the terminal 
or binding posts P, on the base of the coil, the cur- 
rent flows through the primary windmg B. This 
instantly produces a high degree of magnetism in 
the core A, and the pole-piece T of the core 
extension R becomes strongly magnetic and 
attracts the iron button W of the spring M. 
This draws the spring M away from the end of 
the screw K, and in consequence breaks the 
electric circuit. This results in the demagnetizing 
of the pole-piece T and the consequent return of 
the spring M to its normal position in contact 
with the end of the screw K. So long as the 
electric circuit remains closed this operation is 
repeated at a very high rate of speed. The 
effect of this continuous operation of the coil is to 
produce an intermittent current in the secondary 
winding of high intensity and velocity. If wires 
are placed in the holes in the small terminals or 
binding posts on the top of the coil and brought 
within a short distance of each other, a stream 
of sparks will pass from one wire to the other in 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 121 

a peculiar zigzag manner and emit a loud, crackling 
noise, accompanied by a peculiar odor, caused 
by the formation of ozone through the electro- 
chemical action of the spark. 

Under ordinary circumstances the arc or spark 
which occurs on the breaking of the contact be- 
tween the platinum points of the screw K and 
spring M would not be utilized, but by means of 
the condenser in the base, which is connected to 
these parts, as before described, the static charge 
of electricity generated by this action is stored in 
the condenser. When the contact is again made 
this stored electric energy is given up or dis- 
charged by the condenser and flows through the 
primary winding of the coil in connection and in 
the same direction as the battery current and 
increases the magnetic effect of the core A 
enormously. 

When the coil is used in connection with a gas 
or gasoline motor a form of ignition device known 
as a spark plug is used. This is connected with 
the secondary terminals and screwed into the 
combustion chamber of the motor. A form of 
circuit breaker upon the motor is used to make 
and break the electric circuit at the desired point, 
and the resulting arc or spark inside the combus- 
tion chamber ignites the charge of vapor. 

This style of coil is sometimes used without the 
electro-magnetic vibrator, and a mechanical make 
and break device, actuated by the motor, is 



122 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

used instead, producing as a rule only a single 
spark. 

To remove any doubt as to the origin of the 
secondary or jump-spark form of induction coil, 
it may be here briefly stated, that it was invented 
by IlumkorfF in the year 1851, long before the 
inception of the automobile. 

Electrical Rules and Formulas. Force is 

any cause of change of motion of matter. It is 
usually expressed by volts, pounds or other units. 

Resistance is a counter-force or whatever 
opposes the action of another force. 

Work is force exercised in traversing or cross- 
ing a sf)ace against a resistance or counter-force. 
Force multiplied by space or distanc»e represents 
work in foot-pounds. 

Energy is the capacity for doing work, and is 
m(»asured by the work done. 

The cause of a manifestation of energy is force. 
If this be electro-motive energy or electric energy 
in current form it is called Electro-mOtive force. 
The practical unit of electro-motive force is the 

Volt. 

When electro- motive force does work in a 
closed electric circuit a current is produced. The 
practical unit of current is called the Ampere. 

A current of electricity, when flowing in a closed 
electric circuit, passes through some substances 
more easily than through others. 

The relative ease of passage of. the electric- 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 123 

current is known as conductance. In practical 
calculations its reciprocal, which is called resist- 
ance, is generally used. This practical unit is 
known as the Ohm. 

A current of one Ampere is maintained by one 
Volt through a resistance of one Ohm. 

Ohm's Law may be generally stated under the 
following heads: 

The current is in direct proportion to the 
voltage of the circuit, and inversely proportional 
to its resistance. 

1. The current is equal to the voltage divided 
by the resistance of the circuit. 

2. The voltage is equal to the current multiplied 
by the resistance of the circuit. 

3. The resistance of the circuit should cijual 
the voltage divided by the current recjuired. 

Ijei C be the current in amperes flowing in the 
closed electric circuit, and E the electro-motive 
force or voltage, if II be the resistance of the cir- 
cuit when closed, then 

^-1 ^^) 

V=CXR (2) 

R=p (3) 

Example: What current vnll pass througli a 
primary spark coil having a resistance of 1.5 
ohms, with a storage battery of 6 volts in the 
coil circuit? 



124 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

Answer: By Formula 1, 6 volts divided by 1.5 
ohms gives 4 amperes as the current which will 
pass through the coil. 

Example: The lamp of a small electric 
headlight is marked 4 amperes, 2 ohms. How 
many cells of 2-volt storage batteries will be 
necessary to operate this lamp? 

Answer: By Formula 2, 4 amperes multiplied 
by 2 ohms equals 8 volts. Therefore 8 volts 
divided by the voltage of a single battery, which 
is 2 volts, gives 4 cells as the number required. 

Example: A dry battery has an electro-motive 
force or voltage of 1.5 volts, and an internal 
resistance of one-eighth of an ohm. What is its 
maximum current capacity? 

Answer: By Formula 3, 1.5 volts divided by 
0A25 ohms equals 12 amperes as the maximum 
current capacity of the battery. 

Electricity, Forms of. Electricity or electrical 
energy may be generated in several ways — 
mechanically, chemically and statically or by 
friction. By whatever means it is produced, 
there are many properties which are common to 
all. There are also distinctive properties. The 
current supplied by a storage battery will flow 
continuously until the battery is practically 
exhausted, while the current from a dry battery 
can only be used intermittently: that is, it must 
have slight periods of rest, no matter how short, 
they may be. 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 125 

The dynamo or magneto current is primarily 
of an alternating nature or one which reverses its 
direction of flow rapidly. In us^, this alternating 
current is changed into a direct or continuous 
current flowing in one direction only, by means 
of a commutator. Any of the forms described 
are capable of igniting an explosive charge in a 
motor cyUnder, but the static or frictional form 
of electricity is not used for this purpose on 
account of its erratic nature. 

Electric Lamps. It is well to remember that 
electric lamps consume a great deal of power. 
One 16 candlepower lamp requires about one- 
twelfth of a horsepower to operate it. The 
electrical energy required per candlepower is a 
trifle over 4 watts. A 4-volt, 4 candlepower 
lamp would require a storage battery of 24 
ampere-hour capacity to enable the lamp to bum 
6 hours. The same battery would run a 4-volt, 
1 candlepower lanip 24 hours. 

Electric Motors. A well designed electric 
motor for use in connection with a storage battery 
for automobile propulsion must be capable of 
withstanding an overload of over 100 per cent for 
at least thirty minutes at a time, or for even a 
longer period, without unduly overheating. The 
motors used on electric automobiles are usually 
series-wound, as this type of winding has been 
found to give the most satisfactory results in 
general use. 



126 THE AUTOMOBILE HAXD-BOOK 

There are three types of electric motors in 
general use, these are: 

Shunt- wound motors, in which the field- 
magnets are wound with a great many turns of 
very small wire, the ends of which arc directly 
connected to the terminals of the commutator 
brushes. 

Series-wound motors, which have the field- 
magnets wound with a few turns of very large 
wire. One end of this wire is connected to one 
commutator brush terminal. The other end of 
the wire on the field-coils and the other brush 
terminal being connected with a battery or other 
source of current. 

Com pound- wound motors are a combination of 
the above motors, having the field-magnets 
double- wound, that is with both shunt and series- 
windings. 

The armature of an electric motor is built up 
of a number of disks of sheet iron, which are 
separated from each other by a suitable coating of 
varnish or by the use of thin sheets of paper 
between the disks, this is to prevent what are 
known as eddv currents, which are a source of 
constant trouble if not eliminated. 

The function of the commutator of an electric 
motor is to receive the current from the battery 
or other source of power, by means of the 
brushes, and transmit it to the windings or coils 
upon the periT^^ery of the armature. 



THK AUTOMOBILE HAx\D-BOOK 127 

The essential features of an electric motor are 
as follows: 

The brushes, which are located upon and 
around the periphery of the commutator and 
serve to transmit the current to the commutator 
from the outside source or supply. 

The commutator or current distributer and 
laminated wrought iron armature. 

The field-magnets and pole-pieces; the latter 
are usually an extension of the magnet core. 

The magnet frame, usuaUy of cast steel. 

Figure 47 shows a form of series-wound 
electric motor of the style most commonly used 
for automobile work. The motor is of the four- 
pole type, having its field-coils arranged at equi- 
distant points around the periphery or circum- 
ference of the armature. The armature shaft is 
carried by ball-bearings, with suitable screw and 
clamp adjustment as shown. The armature is 
of the slot-wound type and has a commutator 
with self-adjusting carbon brushes. The left- 
hand extension of the armature shaft is fitted with 
a key and washer for the driving gear or sprocket, 
while the right-hand end has a pulley or brake 
wheel to use for stopping the car under ordinary 
conditions of travel. The magnet frame is of 
cast steel and the magnet cores and armature 
disks of laminated wrought iron. The field-coils 
are machine-wound and the armature coils form- 
wound, while both are thoroughly taped and 



128 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BQOK 




THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 129 

waterproofed. The commutator generally has 
the same number of sections as the armature has 
slots and is usually of large diameter and wide 
contact face. 

Electric Motor Troubles. Electric motor 

troubles may be classed as follows: Open- 
circuits, improper connections and short-circuits. 

An Open-circuit may be found at any one of 
the following places: 

Battery terminals. These may be badly cor- 
roded or worked loose, so as to form a poor or 
improper electrical contact. 

Controller. A connection may have worked 
loose, or the spring contact-fingers are not making 
good contacts. 

The removable plug may be out or not making 
a proper contact. 

Brushes. One of the carbon brushes of the 
motor may have fallen out, or the brush springs 
may be too weak to insure a good contact. 

The reversing switch may be halfway over, 
thus leaving the batteries and motor on an open 
circuit. 

All points of contact, such as terminals or bind- 
ing-posts, brush-holders, switches and controller 
spring contact-fingers, should be bright and clean 
so as to give a perfect metal-to-metal contarrt. 

The fact that the car will not start and the 
anuneter shows no current indication is generally 

a sign of Improper battery connections. 



130 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

When the different trays of the battery are not 
properly connected together, short-circuits vni\ 
occur between these sections and run down or 
exhaust the batteries in a very short time. All 
battery terminals should be plainly marked so 
that it is impossible to make wrong connections. 
If the trouble above stated occurs the battery 
trays must be wrongly connected amongst them- 
selves. 

If the ammeter indicates a lai^e current and 
the motor refuses to turn, the trouble is what is 
known as a Short-circuit, or a path for the 
current outside of the motor. 

I^ift one of the commutator brushes and if the 
amperage shown by the ammc^lcr drops, or 
perhaps disappears altogether, om of the field- 
coils is short-circuited or there is a broken wire 
touching some part of the metal of the car or an 
exposed portion of another wire. 

Electric Motors, Speed-Regulation of. The 

speed and conse(|uently tlie power of an electric 
motor may be varied in three ways, as follows: 

First, by introducing variable resistances in the 
motor and hatterv circuit. 

« 

Second, by varying the voltage of the batteries 
by different combination of th(» battery trays. 

Thirdlv, bv connectinf; the field-coils of the 
motor, all in scries, in series- parallel and all in 
parallel. Various other combinations of the 
above named methods mav also be had. 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 131 

Electro-magnetic Vibrator, Independent 

Form of. Gasoline motors with liigh compression 
and speed require a jump- spark of greater 
intensity and volume than those with less com- 
pression and speed, to properly ignite the charge. 
They consequently require a battery of higher 
voltage and greater current volume to induce 
a greater flow of the magnetic flux or lines of 
force in the iron core of the coil. This has the 
efifect of reducing the number of vibrations per 
minute of the trembler attached to the coil. 
Numerous tests have shown that when the motor 
to which such a coil is attached attains a certain 
rate of speed, the vibrator refuses to work when 
the circuit is closed by the commutator on the 
motor. That is due to the fact that the period 
of time during which the electrical circuit is closed 
and opened by the commutator is not of suflScient 
duration to allow the vibrator to properly perform 
its function. It is to overcome these objections 
that the electro-magnetic vibrator, here illustrated 
and described, is intended. 

Figure 43 is a plan or top view, clearly showing 
the wiring and connections to the terminals or 
binding-posts. This is also an important point 
in the construction and enables the operator to 
connect the vibrator to the coil, battery and motor 
without any chart or previous instructions, and if 
properly connected as marked, no ground or 
short-circuit can occur. P and P are the con- 



1 ;V2 



THK ATTOMOIULK HAND-BOOK 



nections to the primary winding of the induction 
(!oil: B and B> the battery connections, and C 
and C the connections to the connnutator on the 
motor. The wiring shown by the dotted lines 

between the ter- 
minals P and 
B, and also be- 
tween P and C, 
are merelv 
blind or dum- 
my wires, so as 
to prevent any 
mistakes in the 
wiring of the 
car, as all con- 




VIBRATOR 



FK5.48 



nections hetwoen the battery, coil and motor 
must bo made through the vibrator. As this 
electro-magnetic vibrator is not connected in 
series with the battery and coil current, but is 
in a simple shunt from the battery, it utilizes only 
a fraction of the battery current, while the 
remainder of the current goes directly to the 
primary winding of the coil, and the current used 
by the coil is at all times controlled by the opera- 
tic m of the vibrator. 

'Vhe trouble experienced by owners of cars 
having multi-cylinder motors equipped with the 
ordinary vibrator or trembler form of jump-spark 
ignition indicates that something more reliable, 
more nearly fool proof, and therefore better 



THE AUrUxMOBlLE HAND-BOOK 133 

adapted to the requirements of the automobile 
maker and user, is required. The use of this 
device insures the absolute synchronization or 
timing of the spark in multi-cylinder mjtors with 
any number of cylinders. 

Electro-motive Force, Definition of. The 

cause of a manifestation of energy is force; if it 
be electric c^nergy in current form it is called 
Electro-motive force. An electro-motive force 
or pressure of One Volt will force One Ampere 
through One Ohm of resistance. 

English and French Units— See Table No. 15. 
Exhaust, Cause of Smoky. Smoke coming 

from the exhaust of a gasoline motor is due to 
one of two conditions: Over-lubrication — too 
much lubricating oil being fed to the cylinder of 
the motor — or too rich a mixture, that is, too 
much gasoline and an insufficient supply of air. 
The first condition may be readily detected by 
the smell of burned oil and a yellowish smoke. 
The second, by a dense white smoke accompanied 
by a pungent odor. 

Exhaust-valves, Diameter and Lift of. The 

formulas and Table No. 1, given for admission- 
valves, apply also to exhau-it-valvcs. For motors 
with excessively hi^li speed, the valve diameter 
given by the formula or table should be increased 
at least 15 per cent, the formula will then read, 

BXSXR 

~ 13,000 



134 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

where D is the required diameter of the valve 
opening, B the bore of the cylinder, S the stroke 
of the piston and R the number of revolutions 
per minute of the motor — see Admission- valves. 
Diameter and Lift of, also Valves. 

Explosive Motors, Cycles of. Why two-cycle 

and four-cycle as applied to a motor? Why not 
one-cycle and two-cycle as used in England? 
The questions are by no means new, but are 
none the less pertinent for that. In the auto- 
mobile business, where many people of com- 
paratively little learning in mechanical matters 
have to deal with terms which, until now, have 
been strange to them, it is desirable that the 
language used be as nearly descriptive as possible. 
The terms quoted are ambiguous, to say the least. 
Why they are used is inexplicable. According 
to the best encyclopedic authorities a cycle may 
be defined as a series of events or happenings 
which recur in regular succession at stated periods 
of time. In so-called two or four-cycle motors 
the operation, during each successive stroke of 
the piston, is not completed within itself, but is 
dependent on one or more conjunctive strokes to 
complete the event or happening or, in other 
words, the cycle of events. It is impossible, 
therefore, to describe the movement of the 
piston, backward or forward, as a cycle. In the 
one case it is only half a cycle and in the other a 
quarter and hence it is not entitled to the dignity 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 135 

commonly but erroneously applied to it. It 
would be more nearly correct to indicate the type 
of motor by the number of revolutions of the 
crank shaft and flywheel as, for example, one- 
revolution motor or two- revolution motor. This 
might, for convenience, be changed to one and 
two-cycle motor as stated. 

Explosive Motors, Types and Forms oL 

When explosive motors were first introduced the 
use of gasoline in connection with them had not 
been considered as a possibility. In later years, 
however, coal gas has been largely superseded by 
gasoline vapor, and gasoline motors are to-day 
far more common than gas motors. The prin- 
ciple of operation of the two are identical, how- 
ever, and it should be understood that while 
gasoline motors are referred to, the description 
appUes equally to gas motors. 

In 1838 the first two-cycle gas motor was 
patented in England by William Barnett. 

In 1862 Beau de Rochas formulated the cycle 
of operation of an explosive motor, as afterward 
built by Professor Otto, commonly known as the 
Otto four-cycle motor. 

In 1876 the first practical working motor 
was introduced by Crossley Bros., of Man- 
chester, England, under the patents of Professor 
Otto. 

Explosive motors are of three forms, known as 
stationary, marine and automobile. Their general 



136 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

characteristics are implied by their various 
designations. The stationary motor may l)e 

m 

cither vertical or horizontal. Marine motors, 
design d for application to boats, are almost 
invariably vertical. Automobile motors are of 
comparatively recent intHxluction and of great 
variety, the aim of the designers being to secure 
the maximum of power and minimum of weight. 
Tliev also may be vertical or horizontal. 

These three forms may be again divided into 
two-cycle and four-cycle t\T)es. In the former an 
explosion occurs at every rt*volution. In the 
latter there is an explosicm at every alternate 
revolulion — see Explosive ]\Iotors, Operation of. 

Explosive Motors, Operation of. Explosive 

motors are depcndeut for successful operation on 
I wo things: First, a char;^^* of gas or vapor, 
mixed with suilicicnt air to produce an explosive 
mixture, which is to the motor what air is to the 
lungs of a human Ix^iug, and scMi-ond, a method 
of firing the charge lifter it has ]>een taken into 
the combustion chamber ol' the motor. 

When coal gas i> used the suj)ply is taken from 

the main aud mixed directly vrilli the necessarv 

« 

proportion ol* air. When gasoline is used, air is 
mixed with it in the correct ])roporton by carbu- 
reting devices. 

After the ciiargc (il' g;i> mid air Jims been t^ikeii 
into the cylinilcr it I> coinprcsst\l, as will be 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 137 

Khown later, by the action of the motor itself and 
then fired, usually by an electric spark actuated 
by the motor, but sometimes by the use of a tube 
screwed into the cylinder and heated from the 
outside, the heat, of course, being communicated 
to the gas. The resulting explosion operates the 
motor. 

The principal parts of a four-cycle explosive 
motor are the cylinder, the piston, the piston rings 
which fit into grooves in the piston: two sets of 
valves, one to admit the charge and the other to 
permit it to escape after the explosion: a crank 
shaft and connecting rod which connect it with the 
piston head and a flywheel, who,se presence insures 
steady running of the motor, and whose further 
functions will be better understood as the de- 
scription proceeds. In the two-cycle form of 
motor there is reallv but one valve, the exhaust 
and admission-ports being covered and uncovered 
by the piston itself. 

All of the parts referred to are of the motor 
proper. Other parts, which are separate from 
the motor but on which its operation depends, 
are the carbureter, which supplies the charge of 
gasoline vapor and air for a gasoline motor, or a 
mixing chamber for mixing air and gas in the 
case of a gas motor, and the batteries and other 
parts of the electrical ignition device. 

A part which has no connertioii with the actual 
running of the motor but witii which practically 



138 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

all are fitted is the muffler, whose purppse is to 
deaden the sound of the explosion. 

The cylinders of all except very small motors 
are as a rule partly encased in a chamber through 
which water is circulated, the object of this being 
to keep the cylinder cool. 

Two-cycle Motor. The foregoing outline 
of the functions of the parts of the motor pre- 
pares us for a description of the two-cycle form 
of motor. This particular form of motor draws 
in a charge of gas or vapor, compresses it, fires 
it and discharges the product of combustion or 
burned gases while the crank makes but a single 
revolution and while the piston makes one com- 
plete travel backward and forward. 

Diagram No. 3 shows two sectional views — 
that is to say, views of the motor cut in two, 
longitudiiuiUy — of thj })rincipal parts of a two- 
cycle motor. Other parts, such as the crank 
shaft, connecting rod and flywheel, are omitted 
to avoid confusion. C is the crank case and A 
the admission valve, through which the vapor 
passes to the crank case. B is the inlet passage, 
through which it passes from the crank chamber 
to the cylinder. P is the pist(m. The igniter, 
which makes the electric spark when the lower 
point comes in contact with the upper, is shown 
immediately below the cylinder cover. This 
causes the explosion of the vapor. E is the 
exhaust port, through which the burned charge 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



139 



escape^ after the piston has been driven outward 
by the explosion and has reached the end of its 
stroke. 

Let it be supposed that the motor is still and 
the crank chamber C is full of gas or vapor. To 
start the motor the piston is started by means of 
a crank on the flywheel shaft, and as it passes 



TWO-CYCLE MOTOR DIAGRAM 



No 3 




to the position shown in the left-hand drawing it 
forces the charge of vapor througli the [)ort B 
into the cylinder. The piston then returns to the 
position shown in the right-hand view, moving 
away from the crank chamber C, and in doing 
so closes the port B and the (exhaust ojx'ning K 
and compresses the charge of vapor. '^I'lie points 
of the igniter come together, a spark of-rnrs and 
the resulting explosion forces tlie piston outward 
again. When the piston reaches a point near 



140 THE AUTOMOBILK HAND-BOOK 

the end of the stroke, as shown in the left-hand 
drawing, it uncovers the port E and the burned 
charge passes out, the new charge coming through 
the port B imnieiHately afterwards. 

l^he admission of the new charge to the crank 
chamber is controlled by the action of the piston. 
As the latter travels outward it has a tendency to 
create a vacuum in the crank chamber. This 
draws the valve inward and admits the charge of 
vapor. 

It will he observed that there is a projection 
on the head of the piston. This is generally 
known as a b«ilHe-plate. Its object is to prevent 
the incoming charge from passing directly across 
the cylinder iind out at the exhaust port E, which, 
it will be ol)serv(Hl, is directly opposite it. The 
baffle-plate (iirccts the incoming charge toward 
the combustion chamber end of the cylinder, 
provi(lin<r. as nearly as may be, a pure charge of 
vapor and assisting in the expulsion of the 
remainder of the burned gases remaining in the 
cylinder as a result of the last explosion. 

Fouu-cYCLi: Motor. Diagram No. 4 fur- 
nishes two views of a four-(ycle type of motor 
with some of the jjarts removed, as in Diagram 
No. 30. It show^ a cylindvM' C\ ad mission- valve 
A, a pist(m P, and exhaust-valve E in place of 
the exhaust-port E in Diagram No. 3. 

The left-hand view shows the piston P about to 
suck in a charge of va})or, by the same method as 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



141 



previously described, through the admission- valve 
A into the cylinder C. The suction continues 
until the piston P reaches the po'sition shown in 
the right-hand view. Then the piston returns 
until it again arrives at the position shown in the 
left-hand view, compressing the charge of mixture 




No 4 




FOUR-CYCLE MOTOR DIAGRAM 



during this operation. Just before tlie piston 
arrives at the end of its travel in tliis direction, 
the charge of vapor, now luider (•()ni]>ressi()n, is 
ignited by the method previously ex])laine(l and 
its expansion forces the })iston back to the position 
shown in the riglit-liand view. When the piston 
has, for the second time, reached the position 
shown in the riglit-liand drawing, a mechanical 
device opens the exhaust-valve. The exhaust- 
valve remains open until tlie piston has again 
arrived at the position in. the left-hand view. 
Then it closes, the piston again commences to 



i:2 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

draw in a charge of vapor and the cycle of 
operation of the motor is repeated. 

Fiber, Vulcanized. Paper-pulp treated with 
sulphuric acid, washed and afterwards compressed 
into sheet or rod form, is known as vulcanized fiber. 

Field Coil— See Electric Motors. 

Flexible-coupling — See Compensating Joints, 
also Universal Joints. 

Fluxes for Soldering. Some good fluxes for 

soldering purposes are: 

Iron or steel. . . .Borax or sal-ammoniac. 

Tinned iron Resin or chloride of zinc. 

Copper to iron . . Resin. 

Iron to zinc Chloride of zinc* 

Galvanized iron. Mutton tallow or resin. 

Copper or brass . Sal-ammoniac or chloride of zinc. 

Lead Mutton tallow. 

Block tin Resin or sweet oil. 

Flywheels. One of the first and most impor- 
tant considerations in connection with the con- 
struction of a gasoline automobile motor is the 
})rc)per diameter and weight of the flywheel. If 
the diameter and weight of the flywheel be 
known, the speed of the motor or its degree of 
compression will become a variable quantity. 
On the other hand, if the speed of the motor and 
the degree of compression be fixed, the diameter 
or weight of the flywheel rim must be varied to 
suit the other conditions. If the speed of the 

* Chloride of zinc is simply zinc dissolved in hydrochloric 
(muriatic) acid, until the acid is cut or killed. 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 143 

motor and its degree of compression be known, 
the diameter of the flywheel or the weight of the 
flywheel rim may be readily ascertained from the 
following formulas. 

Weight of Rims of Flywheels. The weight 
of the rim of the flywheel is the only portion 
which enters into the following calculations, the 
weight of the web or spokes and hub being 
neglected. 

Let M.P be the mean pressure of the com- 
pression, and A the area of the cylinder in square 
inches. If S be the stroke of the piston in inches, 
and N the number of revolutions per minute of 
the motor, let D be the outside diameter of the 
flywheel in inches and W its required weight in 
pounds, then 

_ M.PXAXSXN 
2560 XD 

Diameter of Rims of Flywheels. A motor 
that is intended to operate at a slow rate of speed 
and consequently with a high degree of com- 
pression, will require a flywheel of much greater 
diameter and weight than a high speed motor of 
the same bore and stroke. It may he well to 
remember that within certain limitations tlie 
diameter and weight of a flywheel should be as 
small as is possible, as an increase in either 
means a reduction in motor speed and a conse- 
quent loss of power. 

To ascertain the diameter of a flywheel when 



144 THE AUTOMOHILK HAND-BOOK 

all other conditions are known, if D be the 
required diameter of the flywheel in inches, then 

M.PXAXSXN 



D= 



2560 X W 



Weight of Rims of Flywheels with a 
(iivEX Fluctuation in Speed. If it be desired 
to run a motor at a practically uniform speed and 
with only a slight fluctuation or variation in the 
velocity of the flywheel, if W be the required 
wcitrht of the flvwheel and X be the allowable 
fluctuation of the flywheel in revolutions per 
minute above and below its normal spetnl, then 

M.PXAXSXN 

~ 865 XX 

IIousepower Stored in Rims of Flywheels. 
It is sometimes desirable to know the amount of 
energy or horsepower which may be stored in the 
rim of a flywheel of known diameter and weight, 
with a given speed. If H.P be the horsepower 
stored in the rim of the flywheel, then 

D^XWXN 

79^2,000 

Safe Speed for Rims of Flywheels. The 
safe velocitv for the rim of a cast iron wheel is 
taken at SO feet per second. Ijvi N be safe speed 
of the flywheel in revolutions per minute, then 

18.J5:]5 



THE AUTOMOBILK HAND-BOOK 145 

The mean pressures corresponding to varying 
degrees of compression may be found by reference 
to Table No. 2 — see Air, Properties of Com- 
pressed. 

M.P = Mean pressure. 

A = Area of cylinder in square inches. 

S = Stroke of piston in inches. 

N = Number of revolutions per minute. 

D= Diameter of flywheel in inches. 

W = Weight of flywheel in pounds. 

Balancing with the Reciprocating Parts 
OF THE Motor. The fly^vhee^ should be bal- 
anced as accurately as is possible before mounting 
on the crank shaft. In the first place set the 
crank shaft on two perfectly straight parallel bars, 
one bar under each end. Then attach the con- 
necting rod and piston to the crank and turn 
the shaft until the crank jaws are parallel with 
the floor or in other words at right angles to a 
perpendicular line drawn through the center of 
the shaft. Place a scale under the (rank pin 
or use a hanging scale attached to some rigid 
support above the pin and connect it to the crank 
pin by a wire or cord sufficiently strong to carry 
the weight. Then find the weight of the part^ 
according to the scale and attach the same 
amount to the flywheel at the same distanre from 
the shaft on the side opposite the crank, and the 
result will be a fairlv balanced motor. It is 
impossible to obtain a perfect balance, but the 



146 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

above method will assist greatly in reducing the 
vibration of the motor. 

Four-cycle Motor, Operation of. A four- 
cycle motor has only one working stroke or 
impulse for each two revolutions. During these 
two revolutions which complete the cycle of the 
motor, six operations are performed: 

1. Admission of an explosive charge of gas or 
gasoline vapor and air to the motor-cylinder. 

i2. Compression of the explosive charge. 

,S. Ignition of the compressed charge by a hot 
tube or an electric spark. 

4. Explosion or extremely sudden rise in the 
pressure of the compressed charge, from the 
increase in temperature after ignition. 

5. Expansion of the burning charge during the 
working stroke of the motor-piston. 

(). P^xluiust or expulsion of the burned gases 
from the niotor-cvlinder. 

As {)ressiire increases with a rise in temperature, 
which in a motor the moment after ignition has 
taken place is about 2,700 degrees Fahrenheit, 
the higher tlie temperature of the ignited gases, the 
greater would be the pressure. As this pressure 
is expended in work on the motor-piston, the 
whole of it might, if expansion of the burning 
gases were continued long enough, be utilized. 
Full utilization of the expansion of the gases is 
impossible from a mechanical point of view. 
The expansion of the gases should be as rapid as 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 147 

possible, as the faster the piston uncovers the 
cylinder wall, the less time will be left for the 
transmission of heat or energy to the cylinder wall. 
Gasoline vapor or gas in themselves are not 
combustible, but must be mixed with a certain 
amount of air before ignition and consequent 
combustion can be effecte<l. The combustion of 
the gases is not instantaneous, but continues 
during the entire working stroke of the motor- 
piston. The extremely high temperature pro- 
duced by the combustion necessitates the use of 
cooling devices round the exterior of the motor 
cylinder, such as air-cooling ribs or a water- 
jacket — see also Explosive Motors. 

Fractions of an Inch, Decimal — See Table 
No. 10. 

Frames — See Chassis, also Running Gears. 
Frame-hangers— See Body-hangers. 

French and English Units — See Kilogram, 

Kilometer, Liter — ^Table No. 15. 

Friction Clutches — See Power Transmission 
Devices. 

Friction Drive, Forms of Disk and Roller. 

Since the inception of power-driven macliinerv, 
one of the principal requirements has been so mo 
form of speed -changing derice to suit the? varviu;^ 
conditions of the work. Devices for this purfKisc 
are of such innumerable forms and types that it 
would not be within the scope of this work to 
discuss them. 



148 THE AUTOMOBILE HANEX-BOOK 

The oldest form of speed-changing device in 
use consists of two sets of pulleys of different 
diameters on parallel shafts, driven by an endless 
belt. Change of speed is effected by shifting the 
belt from one set of pulleys to another. Another 
motluxi is by two sets of gears, arranged so that 
the required pair of gears can be either slid into 
mesh, or be brought together by means of an 
eccentric. Taper pulleys in the form erf truncated 
cones with their unlike ends adjacent on parallel 
shafts and belt driven, form a third means of 
variable speed transmission, the change being 
effected by sliding the belt along the surface of 
the cones wliile they are in motion. 

In the disk and roller transmission, a roller 
cnf^ages the flat surface of a dLsk, and transmits 
power l)y pressure being brought to bear upon 
the contact surfaces. The speed is increased or 
decreased by sliding the roller along the face of 
the disk l)etween the center and the edge. By 
moving the roller to the right or left of the center 
of the disk, the direction of motion of the roller 
or the disk may l)e changed at will. If the disk 
be the driver the direction of rotation of the roller 
will be changed, and if the roller is driving the 
direction of the rotation of the disk will be 
clianged, when the roller passes from one side of 
the center of the disk to the other. 

The first two forms mentioned, the sets of 
pulleys or gears, are only capable of changes of 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 149 

speed in fixed ratios as 1-2-3 or 1-3-9, etc., while 
the third, the twin taper pulley or cone form, will 
give a gradual variation of speed, with the normal 
driving speed at a halfway point in their length 
if they are of similar dimensions throughout. 
The disk and roller form of speed-change trans- 
mission is not only capable of giving a gradual 
increase or decrease of speed, but, as before 
stated, by sliding the roller from one side of the 
center of the disk to the other, a change in the 
direction of rotation of either roller or disk may 
be effected. 

But the disk and roller f^rm of variable speed 
transmission has an objection in the fact that the 
portion of the face of the disk which is in contact 
with the roller does not travel at a uniform rate 
of speed throughout the length of the roller 
contact. Suppose the roller were made in three 
separate sections, with only line contacts or knife 
edges, one inch apart, and that the radius of 
travel of the center section of the roller from the 
center of the disk was four inches, and for the 
inner and outer sections, 3 and 5 inches respec- 
tively. The travel of the center section of the 
roller on the surface of the disk for one revolution 
would be 25.13 inches, for the outer section 
31.42 inches, and for the inner section 18.85 
inches. This plainly shows that slippage must 
take place during the transmission of power by 
means of the disk and roller method. 



150 THK AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

In spite of this fact and on account of its 
simplicity of construction the disk and roller form 
of variable speed transmission is in use for a 
great many different purposes in the mechanical 
arts. Examples are small drill presses, grinding 
machines and countershafts. In automobile use 
it forms an ideal method of transmission with 
variable speed and reverse or change of direc'tion, 
without gears or belts. 

While there are a great many combinations 
and adaptations of the disk and roller form of 
variable speed power transmission in use, they 
are all l)ase(i on the three elementary forms 
of construction shown in the accompanying 
drawings. 

The upper view in Figure 49 shows one form 
of disk and roller transmission, in which the disk 
forms an integral part of the motor flywheel, and 
the power is transmitted to the driving wheels of 
the vehicle bv suitable means from the roller 
shaft. As the power to be transmitted by the 
device is at all times proportional to the velocity, 
in feet per minute, of the path of travel of the 
roller t)n the disk, and to the pressure at the 
contact between the disk and roller, it follows 
that the nearer the center of the disk the roller 
travels, I he less its veUxity, and the greater the 
pressure renuiriHl between the disk and roller to 
transmit the same power. In this tj'pe the disk 
veWity is uniform and the roller speed variable. 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK ISl 



^I- 


rl 
V ' 


^I- 




■^I- 


w 


> 


U JUL U 

Fig. 49 ^ 



152 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

The center view is another form of disk and 
roller transmission, in which the roller is slidably 
located upon the motor shaft, and the power 
transmitted to the driving wheels of the vehicle, 
through the medium of a countershaft carrying 
the disk. With this arrangement, as the roller 
speed is constant, the speed of rotation of the 
disk will vary, as the roller is moved from the 
center to the periphery of the disk. The same 
pressure is required to transmit the same power 
when the roller is at the periphery of the disk, 
and the disk shaft at its slowest speed, as when 
the roller is near the center of the disk, and the 
disk shaft at its highest speed. 

Another form of disk and roller transmission, 
in which two rollers and disks are employed, is 
shown in the lower view. One roller and disk 
run loose. By this method twice the power can 
be transmitted as in the case of the constructions 
previously illustrated. Double the pressure must, 
of course, be put upon the loose disk to eflFect 
this increase of power. When both rollers are 
at the periphery of the driving disk on the motor 
flywheel, the pressure upon both rollers is alike, 
as the idle roller transmits its portion of the 
power tlirough the idler disk l)ack to the sliding 
roller, tlms giving twice the traction of the single 
roller device. When the sliding roller is moved 
toward the center of the disks, the pressure from 
the idler disk is increased upon the sliding roller 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK I53 

and consequently decreased upon the idle roller, 
thus giving a greater tractive effort than if the 
idle roller were not used. While slightly more 
complicated, the advantage of this construction 
over the other forms is obvious. While the 
pressure upon the idler disk is doubled, the 
pressure upon the contact surface of the driving 
roller is the same as if only one roller were used 
and but half the power transmitted. 

The following formulas deduced from the 
results of tests give the power which can be trans- 
mitted by the constructions shown in Figure 49. 

Let P be the pressure in pounds between the 
contact surfaces of the disk and roller, F the 
width of the face of the roller, C the coeflBcient 
of adhesion or tractive effort between the contact 
surfaces, N the speed in revolutions per minute, 
R and L the radii as shown in the drawings, and 
H.P the horsepower transmitted by the disk and 
roller. Then 

„^ PxFxCxNxR,^^ , ^ 

^^= 21:000 (Nos.land2) 

„^ PXFXCXNXRXL,^, 
^^= 63.000 X(R+L) (^" ^) 

The values of C for different materials are given 

as follows: 

0.15 Cast Iron and Cast Iron. 

0.18 Cast Iron and Copper. 

0.25 Cast Iron and Rawhide. 

0.27 Copper and Rawhide. 

0.30 Rawhide and Rawhide. 



154 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

Example: What will be the maximum and 
minimum horsepower transmitted by a disk and 
roller of the form illustrated in the upper view in 
Figure 49, with copper-faced disk and ca^t iron 
roller of 1 inch face? The contact circles on the 
disk are 3 and 7h inches respectively, and the 
motor speed is 900 revolutions per minute, with 
100 pounds pressure at the contact surfaces. 

Answer : As the coefficient of traction for cast 
iron and copper is 0.18, then the minimum wnll 
be : 100 X 1 X 0. 18 X 900 X 3, or 48,600, divided by 
'^ 1,000, which gives 2.31 horsepower. The max- 
imum will be 100X1X0.18X900X7.5, v^hich 
equals 121,500, divided by 21,000, givmg 5.78 
horsepower. 

Example: Under the same conditions with a 
roller (> inches in diameter, what horsepower will 
the form of transmission illustrated in the center 
view in Figure 41) transmit for minimum and 
maximum disk speeds? 

Answer : As the speed of the roller is constant 
and the disk speed varies as the roller is moved 
in or out from the center, the power transmitted 
will be constant at any portion of the surface of 
the disk, and will be the same as the minimum 
power for the form illustrated in the above 
example, that is, 2.31 horsepower. As the 
leverage is increased as the roller moves out, the 
speed of the disk is correspondingly decreased, or 
vice versa. 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 155 

By means of the formulas given the power 
transmitted by any of the three forms illustrated 
may be readily calculated for a given pressure, 
speed and width of roller contact-surface. 

Front Axles — See Axles. 

Fuel Economy, Effect of Motor-speed on. 

In a well designed gasoline motor with admission 
and exhaust valves of ample proportions, a 
practically full charge should be taken into the 
motor cylinder at any rate of speed and the com- 
pression will improve considerably at high speeds 
owing to the time for leakage between the piston- 
rings and cylinder wall being diminished. This 
gives a decided gain in fuel economy. Above a 
certain rate of speed, however, the compression 
pressure will be reduced, due to the increased 
friction of the gases in their passage through the 
carbureter, admission-pipes and valves of the 
motor. With increased motor speed less time is 
allowed for the heat developed in the charge dur- 
ing compression, to pass through the cylinder wall, 
thus increasing the temperature and consequent 
explosion pressure of the gases at the time of 
their ignition. This also improves the fuel 
economy of the motor. 

Gases, Expansion of. All gases expand 

equally, j\^ part of their volume for each degree 
of temperature. Centigrade, or jj^ part of their 
volume for each degree of temperature, 
Fahrenheit. 



156 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

Gas Lamps. The gas used in gas lamps is 
generated by water, in minute quantities, drop- 
ping on acetylene (carbide of calcium) ; the gas 
thus formed passes from the generating chamber 
into the body of the lamp and is consumed at 
the lava tips, which are placed in front of a 
highly polished mirror. The generators in 
some cases are separated from the lamp itself 
and placed on the dashboard or under the 
hood, a rubber hose conveying the gas to the 
lamp. 

Gasoline Explosions. There are two entirely 
different kinds of explosion, which would 
undoubtedly l)oth be referred to as gasoline 
explosions. The real gasoline explosion is the 
kind taking place in the cylinder of a gasoline 
motor, in which heat and pressure are suddenly 
produced hy the combustion of gasoline vapor in 
air. The other kind of explosion referred to may 
be explained as follows: 

If a tank of gasoline be placed on a woodpile 
and the latter set on fire, the heat would raise 
a pressure in the tank, which would rapidly 
increase and the tank would finally explode from 
the pressure. The gasoline would then be 
thrown in all directions, and, ownng to its super- 
heated condition, the greater part of it at least 
would instantly vaporize, mix wnth the air of the 
atmosphere and be ignited by the flame which 
caused the explosion. 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 157 

Gasoline Fires, Extinguishing. A number 

of fires have been caused by leaky gasoline pipes 
on automobiles and many persons would like 
to know of chemicals which can be used to put 
out such fires. Water is an exceedingly dangerous 
proposition to use and it is not always possible 
to get at the fire to smother it with wet rags or 
waste. 

In case of fire due to gasoline, use fine earth, 
flour or sand on top of the burning liquid. 
Never use water, it will only serve to float the 
gasoline and consequently spread the flames. 

A dry powder can be used for this purpose 
which will extinguish the fire in a few seconds. 
It is made as follows: Common salt, 15 parts^ 
sal-ammoniac, 15 parts — bicarbonate of soda, 
20 parts. The ingredients should be thoroughly 
mixed together and passed through a fine mesh 
sieve to secure a homogeneous mixture. 

If by any chance a tank of gasoline takes fire 
at a small outlet or leak, run to the tank and 
not away from it, and either blow or pat the 
flame out. Never put water on burning gasoline 
or oil, the gasoline or oil will float on top of the 
water and the flames spread much more rapidly. 
Throw fine earth, sand or flour on top of the 
burning liquid. Flour is best. The best 
extinguisher for a fire of this kind in a room that 
may be closed, is ammonia. Several gallons of 
ammonia, thrown in the room with such force as 



158 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

to break the bottles which contain it, will soon 
smother the strongest fire if the room be kept 
closed. 

Gasoline, How Obtained. Benzine, Gasoline, 
Kerosene and the kindred hydro-carbons are 
products of crude petroleum. 

They are separated from the crude oil by a 
process of distillation. The process is very 
similar to that of generating steam from water. 

Crude petroleum subjected to heat will give oflf 
in the form of vapor such products as Benzine, 
Gasoline and Kerosene, etc. The degrees of 
heat at which these products are separated are 
comparatively low. Various degrees of heat will 
separate the distinct products. As a means of 
illustration, it may be said that the crude oil when 
raised to certain temperatures gives oflF vapors 
which when cooled liquefy into what are known 
as Benzine, Gasoline and Kerosene. 

Gasoline Motors — See Explosive Motors. 

Gasoline, Not Dangerous. A lighted match 
placed at the opening of a new 2-gallon can of 
gasoline merely caused a small flame an inch 
long, which could be extinguished with the point 
of a finger. 

Gasoline was poured into an open vessel and a 
lighted cigarette dropped into it. Result: It 
was at once extinguished. 

A lighted cigarette was smoked vigorously from 
within two feet above to a quarter of an inch of 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 150 

the gasoline — also all around and underneath the 
vessel, but no ignition occurred. 

A small quantity of gasoline was poured on a 
cigarette while smoking — still no ignition occurred. 

A can was then made hot, and the gasoline 
poured into it, so that it would vaporize more 
quickly — a lighted cigarette was then smoked into 
it, as in the third case, but failed to cause 
ignition. 

Gasoline Tanks — See Tanks. 

Gasoline Motor Gonstraction. Wlien design- 
ing a gasoline automobile motor, the first question 
that will arise is as to the pro[)er number of 
cylinders. The question as to the proper number 
of cylinders for an explosive motor may be briefly 
summed up as follows: A single cylinder has 
the merit of simplicity, and requires less mechan- 
ism to operate it, but tends towards excessive 
vibration. Multi-cylinders develop more power 
with less weight and reduce the motor vibration 
and strain, and have also other advantages over a 
single cylinder. The question therefore is : How 
many cylinders are best in practice? To give the 
best results, a two-cylinder motor should, if the 
cranks are opposed, have its cylinders in axial 
alignment in order to ensure a uniform impulse. 
If the cranks and cylinders are (jpposed it is 
possible to obtain correct mechanical balance of 
connecting rods and pistons, and vibration Ls thus 
diminished. If the cylinders arc of the twin form 



16;) THE AUTOMOBILK HAND-BOOK 

with the cranks opposed, explosion =? will nec- 
essarily follow each other at a half revolution, 
and one and a hal? revolutions apart. This gives 
irregular impulses which tend to set up vibration. 
The next best construction is three cylinders, 
with the cylinders parallel, and the cranks set at 
an angle of 1'20 degrees. This gives regular 
impulses two-thirds of a revolution apart, and 
consequently a more uniform strain on the parts, 
and reduces vil)rati()n. 

A four-cylinder motor has greater advantages 
of mechanical balance than the three-cylinder 
form, but on the other hand, by reason of the 
greater amount of exposed cylinder wall for a 
given capacity, it is not as economical in fuel 
consumption. The greater advantage of four as 
compared with tlie three cyHnders, is a greater 
division of the inij)ulses, reducing vibration to a 
minimum. 

Other points to be considered in the design of 
a motor are: 

File pro])cr arrangement or location of all 
working parts so as to be rc^adily accessible for 
repair or adjustment. 

Practicallv automatic lui>ricati()n of the motor. 

■ 

The best and simplest method of operating the 
admission antl exhaust-vahes. 

The propcT diameter and weight of flywheel 
and a ])racti('ally correct I)ahince of the recipro- 
cating parts of the motor. 



THE AUTOMOBILE HANU-BOOK 











nt- 


1 




r^l ? 1 




12^ 


m 


^^j^riy" 




'k 


yp 




10_ 


■^C 


31 ft=^ 




9- 


o 


4 v^ 


8-^M 




^ XJ 


J/ 




6^-^ 1 


Fig. 50 



Vertical Cylisdei 


, WATEIt-t 


uuLKii Gasoline MoTim. 


0. Crank case. 




a. Cyllntu.r.'* '' 



The best and most reliable sy.slcm of ignition, 
with a view to eliminating ignitiiin troubles. 

The most economical type of carbureter and 
one that will require the lea.-it attention. 



162 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

And last, but not least, reduction of weight, 
simplicity of construction and good mechanical 
design. 

In the construction of motor cylinders ex- 
perience has clearly established one point — that 
the cylinder, with its combustion and valve- 
chambers, should be integral or in one piece, and 
that no joints closed by gaskets should exist back 
of the head of the piston. While all manu- 
facturers do not adhere to this rule, it is a fact 
that many difficulties have been experienced with 
leaky joints, and that the plan of avoiding them 
altogether should be followed. 

Figure 50 shows a vertical cross-section of a 
gasoline automobile motor of the most approved 
mcxlcrn type. It has automatic lubrication, 
detachable inlet or admission-valve and rotary 
pump for the water circulating system. 

Figure 51 illustrates a modern type of vertical 
four-cylinder gasoline automobile motor, having 
the admission-valves automatically throttled by 
means of a centrifugal governor on the end of 
the cam-shaft, as shown in the drawing- The 
admission- valves are mechanically op>erated. 

Wfiile the cooling of the cylinder of an explo- 
sive motor is most successfully accomplished by 
means of a water-circulating system, a number of 
up-to-date cars successfully use cooling devices 
other than water. The success of air cooling for 
explosive motors is due in most cases to the use 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



of a number of ribs ca.st integml with tho cylinder 
and having a largo radiating surface. 

Figure 52 shows a form of vertical air-cooled 
motor with radiating ribs cast around the cylinder 
and valve-chamber. The motor has a detachable, 
atmospherically operated admission -valve, without 




Veiitical Fouh-c-ylisdeh Motor 
Witli meclianically operaterl atiniissi on -valves with auto- 
matic tlirottliiig povenior. 

packing. The valve and cage may be removed 
by simply removing two nuts — see Explosive 
Motors, also Four-cycle Motor. 

Gasoline Motor, Fuel Consumption of. The 
fuel consumption of a motor is always a serious 
question, and one of importance to the purchaser 
as well as to the manufacturer. 



164 THE AUTOMOBII-E HAND-BOOK 




AIR-COOLED MOTOR 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 165 

Ordinarily about one and two-tenths pints of 
gasoline per horsepower hour under full load 
will cover the fuel consumption. That is, when 
the mixture is of the proper explosive quality and 
the water comes from the jacket at a temperature 
of about 160 degrees Fahrenheit. 

The temperature of the water in the jacket 
around the cylinder has a great deal to do with 
the fuel consumption. 

If the water is forced around the cylinder so 
as to keep it cold, the heat from the combustion 
is cooled down so quickly by radiation that the 
expansive force of the burning gases is materially 
reduced, and consequently less power is given up 
by the motor. 

The object of the water is not to keep the 
cylinder cold, but simply cool enough to prevent 
the lubricating oil from burning. The hotter the 
cylinder with effective lubrication the more power 
the motor will develop. 

It should be remembered that a hot motor is 
the most economical in fuel. 

Gasoline, Thermo-dynamic Properties of 

Gasoline and Air. The following table. No. 12, 
gives the thermo-dynamic properties of gasoline 
and air and may be of interest, in view of the 
fact that information on this subject is sparse and 
most of that only theoretical or empirical 
deductions. 

This table gives the explosive force in pounds 



166 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

per square inch of mixtures of gasoline vapor and 
air, varying from 1 to 13 down to 1 to 4, also the 
lapse of time between the point of ignition and 
the highest pressure in pounds per square inch 
attained by the expanding charge of mixture. 
The tests from which the results given were 
obtained, were made with a charge of mixture at 
atmospheric pressure, so as to more accurately 
note the results, as the mixture takes much 
longer after ignition to attain its highest pressure, 
and is slower also in expanding. 

It may be well to remember that there are no 
more heal-units, and consequently no more foot- 
pounds of work in a mixture of gasoline and air, 
under 5 atmospheres compression, than under 1 
atmosphere compression. 

Flanged or ribbed air-cooled motors will ap- 
proach the figures given in the table for the initial 
exj)losive force for the varying compressions , very 
closely, while thermal-syphon water-cooled motors 
will come within about 20 per cent of these results, 
and pump and radiating coil cooled motors will 
come within about 30 per cent. While it appears 
at the first glance that the proper thing to do to 
get the greatest efficiency from a motor would be 
to let it run as hot as possible, experience has 
shown that the repair bill of a hot motor will 
more than offset its efficiency over the cooler 
water-jacketed motor, with pump and radiating 
coils. The last two columns in the table give 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



167 



the temperature of the burning gases, the first of 
the two columns the actual temperature with the 
accompanying mixture of gasoline and air, and 
the second the theoretical temperatures, or tem- 
perature to which the burning mixture should 
attain, if there were no heat losses. 

Table No. 12. 
Thermo-dynamic Properties of Gasoline and Air. 



Gasoline, 

Vapor and 

Air. 


Time in 
Seconds 
between 
Ignition 

and 
Highest 

Pres- 
sure.* 


Explosive Force in 
Pounds per sq. in. 

Compression 
In Atmospheres. 


Temperature 

of Combustion 

in Degrees 

Fahrenheit.* 


3 


4 


5 


Actual. 


Theo- 
retical. 


1 to 13 
1 to 11 
1 to 9 
1 to 7 
1 to 5 
1 to 4 


0.28 
0.18 
0.13 
0.07 
0.05 
0.07 


156 
183 
234 
261 
270 
240 


208 
244 
312 
348 
360 
320 


260 
305 
390 
435 
450 
400 


1857 
2196 
2803 
3119 
3226 
2965 


3542 
4010 
4806 
6001 
6854 
5517 



♦ At atmospheric pressure. 

Gear, Change-speed — See Power Transmission 
Devices. 

Gears, Diametral Pitch System of. Table 

No. 13 gives the necessary dimensions for laying 
out and cutting involute tooth spur gears from 
No. 16 to No. 1 diametral pitch. Formulas are 
also given so that if the number of teeth and the 
diametral pitch are known, the pitch diameter 
can be ascertained — also, the diametral pitch, 



168 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

outside diameter, number of teeth, working depth, 
and clearance at bottom of tooth: 

P = Pitch diameter in inches. 

D — Diametral pitch. 

W= Working depth of tooth in inches. 

T = Thickness of tooth in inches. 

O = Outside diameter in inches. 

C = Circular pitch in inches. 

T 

(1) Pitch diameter =^ 



D 

(2) Outside diameter=P-f 



2 



D 



T 

(3) Diametral pitch =p 

(4) Circular pitch= ' 

(5) Working depth of tooth=^=2-^D 

((]) Number of teeth=P X D 

(7) Thickness of tooth= 1.571 X D 

C 

(8) Clearance at bottom of tooth =^7: 
^ 20 

For example: Required, the pitch diameter of 
a gear with 20 teeth and No. 5 diametral pitch. 
From Formula No. 1, as the pitch diameter is 
equal to the number of teeth divided by the 
diametral pitch, then 20 divided by 5 equab 4, as 
the required pitch diameter in inches. 

What is the outside diameter of the same gear? 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



169 



From Formula No. 2, as the pitch diameter is 
4 inches, and the diametral pitch No. 5, then 4 
plus § equals 4f as the proper outside diameter 
for the gear. 

What would be the diametral pitch of a 
gear with 30 teeth and 5 inches pitch diam- 
eter? From Formula No. 3, 30 divided by 5 
equals 6, as the diametral pitch to be used 
for the gear. In this manner by the use of the 
proper formula any desired dimension may be 
obtained. 



Table No. 13. 
Dimensions of Involute Tooth Spur Gears. 



Diametral 
Pitch. 



1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

10 

12 

14 

16 



Circular 
Pitch. 



3.142 
1.571 
1.047 
0.785 
0.628 
0.524 
0.447 
0.393 
0.314 
0.262 
0.224 
0.196 



Width of 

Tooth on 

Pitch 

Liue. 



1.571 
0.785 
0.524 
0.393 
0.314 
0.262 

0.224 
0.196 
0.157 
0.131 
0.112 
0.098 



Working 

Depth of 

Tooth. 



2.000 
1.000 
0.667 
0.500 
0.400 
0.333 
0.286 
0.250 
0.200 
0.167 
0.143 
0.125 



Actual 

Depth of 

Tooth. 



2.157 
1.078 
0.719 
0.539 
0.431 
0.360 
0.308 
0.270 
0.216 
0.180 
0.154 
0.135 



Clear- 
ance at 
Bottom 
of Tooth. 



0.157 
0.078 
0.052 
0.039 
0.031 
0.026 
0.022 
0.019 
0.016 
0.013 
0.011 
0.009 



Gear, Differential — See Power Transmission 
Devices. 

Gears, Horsepower Transmitted by. The 

following formulas will give the horsepower that 



170 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

may be transmitted by gears with cut teeth of 
involute form and of various metals. 
H.P = Horsepower. 

P=^ Pitch diameter in inches. 

C= Circular pitch in inches.* 

F= Width of face in inches. 

R= Revolutions per minute. 

^ PXCXFXll 
H.P= — (Annealed tool steel.) (1) 

.... P X C X F X R (Mach. steel or Phos- 

H.P= (2) 

140 phor Bronze.) ^ 

PXCXFXR 
U.V= - - (Cast Brass.) (3) 

PX( XFXR , 
H.P= —- (Ca^tlron.) (4) 

Exai.i;)le: lle(juired, the horsepower which 
a tool steel pinion, "2 inches pitch diameter, 1 
inch face and No. 10 diametral pitch, will trans- 
mit at 900 revolutions per minute. 

Answer: From the table the circular pitch 
corresponding to No. 10 diametral pitch is 0.314. 
Then bv Formula No. 1, •2X0.314X1X900 
c(|uals 5i)5.''Z. This, divided by 90, gives 5.29 
horsepower. 

*The ciri'ular i)iti*h I'orrosiKnidliijr to any diametral pitch 
iminbcr. may bo found by dividinjj: thefoustaut 3.1410 by the diam- 
etral pitch. 

Kxtiniple : What is i he oircuhir pitch in inches correspoudlnjc 
to No. G diametral pitch y 

Answer: The result of di^idinK 3.1416hy 6Klves O.MMlllcheif 
as the reciuired circular pitch. 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



171 



Fig. 53 



Gear, Intemal-epicyclic. It is often desired 

to ascertain the speed of rotation of the different 
members of this form 
of gearing. To cal- 
culate their speeds, 
the following formulas 
are given, which, by 
reference to the letters 
designating the differ- 
ent parts in Figure 
53, may be readily 
solved. 




INTERNAL GEAR 



Let R be the revolutions per minute of the disk 
or spider carrying the pinions D. 

Let N be revolutions per minute of the gear E. 

Let G be the revolutions per minute of the 
internal gear F. 

When the internal gear F is locked and gear E 
rotating, the speed in revolutions per minute of 
the disk or spider carrying the pinions D is 

If the internal gear be locked and the spider 
carrying the pinions D be rotated , then the speed 
in revolutions per minute for the gear E will be 

E+F\ 
E ) 

If the spider carrying the pinions D be held 
rigid and the gear E be rotated, the speed in 



R=N| 



n=r(J 



172 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

revolutions per minute for the internal gear F is 

• ^ NXE 

If the pitch diameter of the gears is not readily 
obtainable, the number of teeth in each gear maybe 
used instead, as the result will be exactly the slime. 

Generator. This term is usually applied to 
any form of chemical or mechanical energy which 
can be used to produce a current of electricity. 
Mechanical generators of electricity used for 
ignition purposes are of two forms, dynamos or 
magnetos. The former is self-exciting by means 
of coils of wire wound upon the magnet limbs. 
The latter has permanent magnets instead of 
coils of wire to induce the current in the armature 
of the magneto. Magnetos, on account of their 
simplicity of construction and low first cost, are 
more generally used for ignition purposes than 
dynamos. They may be operated by the motor 
with a friction-pulley, gear or belt. Figure 54 
shows one form of a magneto arranged to be 
operated by the friction pulley on the left-hand 
end of the armature shaft. 

The simplest form of magneto and the one 
shown in Figure 54 consists of two or more mag- 
nets of horse-shoe shape, the ends of which 
embrace the pole-pieces, between which rotates a 
shuttle armature wound with small insulated cop- 
per wire. Rotation of the armature of the magneto 
tends to disturb the path of the lines of force or 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

magnetic flux flowing between the ends of the per- 
manent magnets, which in turn set up powerful 
induced currents in the armature. The current 
produced by the magneto is of an alternating 



(f% 



MAGNETO 



nature, but converted into a direct or continuous 
current by means of the commutator on the 
armature shaft. 

Governor, Use of. All explosive motors when 
ranning under a heavy load slow down or reduce 
their speed very materially. If the load be 
entirely or partially removed from the motor very 
suddenly, it will tend to race. This racing, 
which ca'ises excessive wear and vibration, is 
very injurious to the motor. On light cars with 
small-powered motors, racing is usually prevented 
by some form of hand control, such as retarding 
the ignition or throttling the mixture supply. On 
heavy, high-powered automobiles, racing of the 
motor is eliminated by the use of some form of cen- 
trifugal governor, which controls the motor-speed 




THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



ly one of the three following methods: Retarding 
the ignition — Throttling the supply of mixture — 
Preventing the exhaust-valve from opening. 

Figure 55 shows a form of governor which 
operates by preventing the exhaust-valve from 
opening. When 
the speed of the 
motor passes its 
normal limit, the 
balls A of the 
governor move 
out towards the 
periphery of the 
gear or wheel 
which carries 
them, causing 
the cam B to be 
moved to the rigiit by the action of the d(^ on 
the governor arms, which engage in a grooved 
collar on the sleeve C. 

The nose of the cam B is thus kept out of 
engagement with the roller D until the motor 
resumes its normal speed, thus preventing the 
valve-lifter from opening the valve. 

Normally the cam is held in position by the 
springs attached to tlie governor balls, against 
the shoulder of the bearing F, which carries the 
cam shaft G. 

Grades, Power Required to Climb. Table 
No. 14 gives the approximate horsepower required 




GOVERNOR 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 178 

to move a vehicle with a total load of 1,000 
pounds, at varying speeds. 





HoHSBPOWER Required to 


Mo 


E A 


Vehicle 




Weighing 1000 PonNoa. 


■S 

s 

1 


Speed In Miles per Hour. 


(i 


S 110 


12 


14 


16 


IS 


20 


22 


24 


26 


2S 


30 


5 


1.3 


r^c 


2.6 


3.0 


3.4 


3.8 


4.3 


4.S 


5.2 


5.G 


6.0 


6.5 


6 


1,4 


1.9 2.4 


20 


3.3 


3.8 


4.3 


4.8 


5.3 


5.8 


6.3 


6.7 


7.2 


a 


1.8 


2.3 2.9 


3.5 


4.1 


4.7 


S.3 


55 


6.4 


7.0 


7.6 


8.2 


8.7 


10 


2.1 


2.7 3.5 


4.2 


4.8 


5.5 


9.2 


e.o 


7.6 


8.4 


9.0 


9.6 


10.4 


12 


2.4 


3.2 4.0 


4.8 


5.6 


6.4 


7.2 


8.0 


S.8 


9.6 


10.4 


11.2|12,0 


14 


2.8 


3.6 4.5 


5.4 


6.3 


7.2 


S.l 


9.0 


lO.C 


10.8 


11.7 


12.613.5 


16 


3.1 


4.15.0 


6.1 


7.1 


8,1 


9.1 


10.1 




12.3 


13.1 


14.1 15.1 


18 


3.4 


4.5'5.5 


6.7 


7.8 


9.0 


10.1 


n.o 


i2'l 


13.5 


14,5 


16.616,5 


20 


3.7 


4.9|e.l7.4 


8.6 


..s 


11. 1 


12,2 


13.5 


14.8 


15,9 


17.2 18.3 



Gravity, Acceleration of. Weight is the force 
apparent when gravity act.s upon mass. Mass is 
matter wilhout reference to weight. When mass 
or matter is prevented from moving under the 
stress of gravity, its weight can be appreciated. 

V = Velocity in feet per second 

( =Time in seconds 

h = Height in feet 

9 —gravity constant— 32.2 



ft="-i 



■v= Vi.g.h 
2.k 



-m) 



176 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

Weight does not enter into consideration in the 
above formulas. In a perfect vacuum a feather 
should fall from a given height in the same time 
that a pound weight would. 

Grease Cups — See Lubricators. 

High-tension Current — See Electrical Ignition 
and Induction Coil, also Secondary Current. 

Historical Facts. 1803— Principle of the 
storage battery discovered by Bitter. 

1813 — Hedley demonstrated by ex[>erinient, in 
England, that traction on rails was possible. 

1820 — Ampere developed the fundamental laws 
of electro-dynamics. 

1821 — Michael Faraday caused a wire carrjdng 
an electric current to rotate around a permanent 
magnet. This was the inception of an electric 
motor. 

1823 — The difiFerential-gear movement first 
invented for use in roving frames by Asa Arnold. 

1824 — Sturgeon discovered the electro-mag- 
net. 

1827 — First drop-forging made at Ebrper's 
Ferry by J. H. Hall. 

1828 — Malleable iron discovered by Seth Boyd. 

1830 — Crucible cast steel first made successfully 
at Cincinnati Steel Works. 

1833 — First electric motor made in this country 
by Saxton. 

1834 — Prof. Henry made a practical working 
electric motor. 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 177 

1838 — First two-cycle gas motor patented in 
England by William Barnett. 

1851 — Rumkorff invented the jump-spark coil. 

1853 — First steam motor carriage made in this 
country by J. K. Fisher, New York. 

1859 — First practical storage battery made in 
France by Gaston Plante. Petroleum discovered 
in United States. 

1862 — Beau de Rochas first formulated the 
four-cycle gas motor as afterward built by Pro- 
fessor Otto. 

1876 — First practical gas motor by Professor 
Otto in Germany. 

1881 — Faure type of storage battery first made, 
now almost exclusively used. 

1888 — Gasoline first used in a gas motor by 
Van Duzen of Cincinnati. 

Hoods — See Bodies. 

Horsepower, of Explosive Motors. A horse- 
power is the rate of work or energy expended in 
raising a weight of 550 pounds one foot in one 
second, or raising 33,000 pounds one foot in one 
minute. This is far more work than the average 
horse can do for any great length of time. A good 
horse for a short period of time can do much more. 

As the ordinary formula used for the calculation 
of horsepower in connection with steam engines is 
not directly applicable to explosive motor practice, 
formulas are here given that are more suited to 
the purpose. 



178 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

Let D be the diameter of the cylinder in inches, 
and S the stroke of the piston also in inches ; if N 
be the number of revolutions per minute of the 
motor, and H.P the required horsepower of the 
motor, then for a four-cycle motor 

D'XSXN 
18,000 

Example: What horsepower should be 
developed by a motor of 4j inches bore and 
stroke, at a speed of 1,200 revolutions per minute? 

Answer: As the bore and stroke of the motor 
are alike, the square of the bore multiplied by 
the stroke is equal to the cube of 4 J, which is 
91.125, this multiplied by 1,200, and divided by 
18,000, gives 6.08 as the horsepower of the 
motor. 

From a theoretical standpoint a two-cycle 
explosive motor should not only have as great 
a speed but also be capable of developing almost 
twice the power that a four-cycle motor does. 
It is a fact nevertheless that its actual performance 
is far different. 

The horsepower of a two-cycle motor may be 
calculated from the following formula, 

^^'^ 21,000 

Example: Required, the horsepower of a two- 
cycle motor of 4V inches bore and stroke, with a 
speed of 900 revolutions per minute? 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 179 

Answer: The square of the bore multiplied 
by the stroke b equal to 91.125, which multiplied 
by 900, and divided by 21,000, gives 3.91 as the 
required horsepower. The results given by the 
above examples agree very closely with those 
obtained from actual practice. 

Habs, Ball and Plain-bearing. 'The result 
of experiment shows that the starting friction of 




BALL BEARING HUB 



wheel hubs fitted with ball-bearings is far less 
than that of the most improved design of plain- 
bearing hubs. Some of the objections to the 
more extended use of ballbearings on auto- 
mobiles are as follows: The concentration of 
the load on a very small surface — The friction 



180 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

between the rollers themselves — The need of fre- 
quent adjustment. Plain-bearing hubs, while 
giving somewhat more friction than ball-bearing 
hubs, require little or no attention, are less in 
first cost and less liable to injiuy from road 
shocks or jars. 

Figure 56 shows a ball-bearing hub ot neat 
design and compact form, which is extensively 
used on motor cars of European make. The hi^ 



Fre, 57 




PLAIN BEARING HUB 



proper ant] the removable flange are of cast steel. 
while the end cap or cover is of bronze with a hex- 
agon for removing or replacing the cap. The 
grooves or ball races are of rounded form instead 
of the usual two-point bearing cup. 

A pkin-bcaring hub is shown in Figure 57, 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 181 

fitted with removable bronze bushings, which 
may be easily replaced when worn. The space 
in the center of the hub between the bushings is 
filled with oil or grease for the purpose of lubri- 
cating the spindle of the axle. 

The length of the axle-spindle embraced by the 
bearing should not be less than one-fourth of the 
wheel diameter. 

If the axle-spindle be taper, the large diameter 
should not be less than that of the axle proper. 

An axle-spindle equal in diameter to an axle 
proper of square section, has only 60 per cent of 
its strength or carrying capacity. A generous 
fillet should always be left on the axle-spindle 
next to the flange or collar of the axle. 

Ignition, Catalytic. This method of ignition 
for explosive motors is based on the property 
possessed by spongy platinum of becoming incan- 
descent when in contact with coal gas or carbu- 
reted air. With this means of ignition, speed 
regulation or variation can only be had within 
very narrow limits. The principal objections to 
its extended use are danger of premature ignition, 
lack of speed control and difficulty of starting the 
motor. 

Ignition Circuit. Diagram No. 5 illustrates 
the ignition circuit of a single cylinder motor, 
showing plainly the battery, coil and commutator 
connections. A reference table accompanies 
Diagram No. 5, giving the names of the van- 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



ous parts shown in the drawing of the ignition 
circuit. 



DIAGRAM 




IGNITION CIRCUIT 



1— Dntten-. 


-Condenser, 


3 aiiLl a-Priraary «liv-. 


u-Commulaior. 


l-Vlliriitor. 


l-Ckmtact loaker. 




a-CommutftUir case. 


«-Crank luse. 




7-Cylli«ler. 


1 and I!)— Secnnilary vires. 


8-In<lu.-rlou .-.111. 


fl-Spark pli-B. 



IgoitiOQ Devices. The device illustrated in 
Figure 58 consists of a magneto, having a sbuUle 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



183 



Fig. 58 




IGNITION DEVICE, 



type of armature, which oscillates instead of 
rotating as is usual in other forms of magnetos. 
In the space be- 
tween the arma- 
ture and pole- 
pieces a shield 
or tube of soft 
steel is placed, 
as shown in the 
drawing. To one 
end of this shield 
a crank is at- 
tached, which is 
operated by a 
connecting rod 
from a crank-pin on the cam-shaft of the motor. 
When the shield or tube is oscillated very rapidly, 
a current of electricity is induced or created in the 
wire which composes the winding of the shuttle 
armature. 

Tliis induced current is led by means of an 
insulated wire to the make and break device in 
the combustion chamber of the motor, the other 
wire being grounded on the frame of the magneto. 
When the proper time arrives for firing the 
charge the rod drops into the notch in the cam 
and the projection upon its upper end strikes 
suddenly upon the outer end of the contact-arm, 
causing the electrical circuit to be suddenly broken. 
At the same time the shield or tube is in the 



184 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

proper position to cause the maximum current to 
flow in the winding of the armature coil. No 
battery or coil is required with this form of 
ignition. Another form of ignition mechanism 
has a magneto driven by gearing from the cam- 
shaft of the motor. The armature terminals of 
the magneto are connected to two collecting-rings 
(not a commutator), so that the current given to 
the induction coil is of an alternating kind, but 
tlie electrical circuit is only broken when the 
alternating current is at its maximum value. 

Ignition, Effects of Advancing and Retard- 
ing. It should be remembered that ignition 
timing Ls not the same thing as ignition govern- 
ing, therefore to obtain the best results from an 
explosive motor the charge should be ignited at 
the best possible moment. 

With too early ignition the pressure upon the 
piston becomes excessive and without any 
adequate return of useful woric or energy. It the 
ignition be retarded too much, the maximum 
explosive pressure occurs too late during the work- 
ing or power stroke of the piston and the com- 
bustion of the gases is not complete when the 
exhaust-valve opens. Greater motor speed re- 
quires an early ignition of the charge, but greater 
power calls for late or retarded ignition. 

The reason for advancing the spark when fast 
running is required, is that the explosion or 
ignition of the charge is not instantaneous as may 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 185 

be supposed, but requires a brief interval of time 
for its completion. 

When running a motor with the ignition 
retarded, the mixture should be throttled as much 
as possible, otherwise the motor will overheat. 

When to Retard the Ignition. Always 
retard the ignition before starting the motor, and 
take great care that the ignition is retarded and 
not by mistake advanced. Some cars are fitted 
with a device which prevents the starting crank 
being turned unless the spark is retarded. If it 
is not clear as to which way to move the ignition 
lever, to retard the ignition, move the commutator 
in the same direction as the cam-shaft rotates. 

As soon as the motor slows a little when going 
uphill, retarding the spark enables more power 
to be obtained from the motor at the slow speed, 
that is to say, if the spark is not retarded the 
motor will go slower than if it is retarded. Do 
not retard the lever to the utmost under these 
conditions, on the contrary, retard the lever to 
such a point that the knocking (due to the wrong 
position) ceases. 

Retarding the spark causes the maximum pres- 
sure of the explosion to occur at the best part of 
the stroke, or, rather, the mean pressure of the 
explosion stroke will be lower, if the best point of 
ignition by retarding is not found. This is a 
matter of some skill and practice. 

To slow the motor, cut oflF as much mixture as 



186 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

the throttle allows, then slow the motor still 
further by retarding the spark, but on no account 
retard the spark when the throttle is full open 
(for the purpose of slowing the mptor), as the 
motor will merely discharge a quantity of flame 
at a white heat over the stem of the exhaust valve, 
burning it, softening it, and making it scale. ^ 

Ignition, Electric. Any form of electrical 
ignition requires some outside source of electric 
energy such as a generator or battery to produce 
a spark in the combustion chamber of the motor. 
A primary or secondary induction coil is necessary 
in connection with the source of electric energy 
to give a spark of sufficient intensity to properly 
ignite the compressed charge in the combustion 
chamber of the motor. This method of ignition 
provides a means of varying the motor speed 
throughout a great range of speeds by advancing 
and retarding the point of ignition, or time of 
igniting the explosive charge — see Electrical" 
Ignition. 

Ignition, Hot Tube. The incandescent tube 
system of ignition consists of a tube of metal or 
porcelain, one end of which is closed and the 
other screwed or fastened into the combustion 
chamber bv suitable means. 

The flame of a Bunsen burner is projected 
against the tube, rendering it incandescent, 
resulting in the firing of the compressed chaige 
slightly before the end of the compressicm stroke. 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 187 

This form of ignition has not obtained in auto- 
mobile practice for several reasons, some of which 
are here briefly stated. It causes misfiring of 
the charge on account of either burned or partially 
consumed gases filling the tube. Again, the tube 
may be clogged with dead or burned gases almost 
its entire length, causing premature ignition of the 
fresh charge of gas in the tube on account of its 
being too close to the combustion chamber. An 
almost entire absence of speed regulation of the 
motor, as the gases require a certain degree of 
compression to insure proper ignition. Throttling 
of the charge to obtain a variation in the speed of 
the motor is therefore almost prohibitive or can 
only be used within very close limitations. 

Ignition, Reason for Advancing Point of. 

It may be well to explain without entering into 
theoretical details, that when a motor is running 
at normal speed,, the ignition-device is so set that 
ignition takes place before the piston reaches the 
end of its stroke. The later the ignition takes 
place the slower the speed of the motor and 
consequently the less power it will develop. If, 
however, in starting the motor the ignition-device 
were set to operate before the piston reached the 
end of its stroke, backfiring would result, result- 
ing in a reversal of the operation of the motor 
and possibly in injury to the operator. 

Ignition Troubles, Causes of. Trouble may 
occur, fcom the cam or. commutator not being 



188 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

properly adjusted. The contact-screw of the 
induction coil vibrator may be loose. 

The vibrator or trembler of the coil may not be 
properly adjusted. 

To adjust the vibrator, turn the motor crank 
until the contact is closed, throw in the switch and 
listen for a good clear buzz from the vibrator. 
Do not allow it to buzz slowly but fast, until it 
makes a singing sound like a bumble bee, then 
turn the crank several times and again listen for 
the buzz. Sometimes the vibrator will buzz, but 
it will not buzz when the motor is running fast 
and the motor misfires ; this is probably due to the 
fact that the adjusting screw has made the tension 
of the spring too strong and when a quick contact 
is made it does not have time to vibrate properly. 
Experience is the only teacher for properly 
adjusting the vibrator of an induction coil. 

Many troubles arise from faulty or defective 
insulation. 

A wire placed too close to an exhaust-pipe 
invariably fails after a time, owing to the insu- 
lation becoming burnt by the heat of the pipe. 

A loose mre hanging against a sharp edge will 
invariably chafe through in course of time. 

If the insulation of the coil breaks down it can- 
not be repaired on the road, it should be returned 
to the makers. A slight ticking is usually audible 
inside the coil when this occurs. 

All wires where joined together should be 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 189 

carefully soldered, the joints being afterwards 
insulated with rubber or prepared tapes. Never 
make a joint in the secondary wires. See that 
all terminals are tightly screwed up. When con- 
necting insulated wire, the insulation must be 
removed, so that only the bare wire is attached. 
Wires sometimes become broken, and being loose 
make only a partial contact. 

Battery terminals frequently become corroded, 
they should be covered with vaseline, and require 
periodical cleaning. See that all connections at 
the battery are clean and bright. 

The porcelain of the spark plug may be cracked 
and the current jumping across the fracture. 
The points may be sooty and require cleaning. 
They may be touching and require separating, or 
they may be too far apart. The usual distance 
between the points is about one thirty-second of 
an inch, which is approximately the thickness of 
a heavy business card. 

Clean all oil and dirt from the commutator. 
Most commutators are so placed as to give the 
maximum possible opportunity to collect oil and 
dirt. They should always be provided with a 
cover. 

In course of time dry or storage batteries 
will become weak or discharged. Always carry 
an extra set. 

Spanners, oil-cans, tire-pumps, etc., have been 
known to get on the top of the batteries, thereby 



190 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

connecting the tenninals together and causing a 
short-circuit. 

The platinum contacts of the coil may become 
corroded. They should be cleaned with a small 
piece of emery cloth or sandpaper. 

The platinum points on the trembler may 
become loose. They should be riveted up with 
a small hammer. 

It frequently happens that oil and dirt accumu- 
late on the platinum contacts, which interrupt the 
free flow of the current. Care should be taken, 
therefore, that they are always perfectly clean. ^- 

Indicator Diagrams. The thermal or heat 
efficiency of an explosive motor may be deter- 
mined from an indicator diagram, which gives a 
representation of the internal conditions through- 
out the entire cycle of operations. The diagram 
tells many tilings essential to be known. 

It gives the initial explosive pressure, or 
the pressure a moment after ignition has taken 
place. It shows whether the volume of the 
charge is diminished during the period of admis- 
sion. It gives the point of ignition, when the 
ignition is complete and when expansion begins. 
It indicates the pressure of expansion during the 
working stroke. It gives the terminal pressure 
when the exhaust is opened. It shows the 
rapidity of the exhaust. It indicates the back- 
pressure on the piston, due to the exhaust. It 
shows the point of opening of the exhaust It 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK igi 

gives the mean power used in driving the motor. 
It also indicates any leakage of valves or piston. 

The usual method of ascertaining the area of 
an indicator diagram is by means of an instru- 
ment known as a planimeter, which is used to 
calculate the area of any irregular surface, by 
moving a tracing point attached to the instrument 
over the entire irregular boundary line of the 
figure. 

But for the purpose of ascertaining the horse- 
power of a motor it will be sufficiently accurate to 
illustrate the principles involved, to calculate the 
area of the diagram by means of ordinates or 
vertical measurements. 

The upper drawing in Diagram No. 6 repre- 
sents a card taken from a motor of 4 inches bore 
and 6 inches stroke, with a speed of 900 revolu- 
tions per minute, and under a full load. The 
diagram is divided into 12 parts as shown by 
vertical lines, the lengths of which are in terms 
of the spring, which is 100. Then 1.90+1.36+ 
1.00, etc., divided by 12, equals 0.665 as the 
average height of the diagram. Its length is 6 
inches, as shown, therefore the area of the card 
is approximately 3.99 square inches. As the 
initial explosive force from the diagram is 250 
pounds per square inch, and a 100 indicator 
spring used, the height of the card is 250 divided 
by 100, which equals 2^ inches as the height of 
the card. The mean effective pressure on the 



192 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



piston in pounds per square inch will therefore he 
equal to the area of the diagram 3.99, divided by 
the area of the whole card, which is 2jX 6, equals 
15, and multiplied by 250, the initial explosive 




INDICATOR DIAGRAMS 



force, or 3.99 X ^250, and divided by 15, equals 66.5 
pounds per square inch as the mean effective 
pressure required. 

From this the indicated horsepower of the motor 
can readily be found as follows: 

Let M.P be the mean effective pressure in 
pounds per square inch, A the area of the cylinder 
in square inches, S the stroke of the piston in 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 193 

inches, N the number of explosions per minute, 
and H.P the indicated horsepower, then 

M.PXAXSXN 



H.P= 



396,000 
66.5X12.56X6X450 



5.69 



396,000 

as the required indicated horsepower of the motor. 
The indicated horsepower of any motor will 
always be greater than that obtained from a 
brake test, as it simply represents the actual 
thermo-dynamic (heat-pressure) conditions within 
the cylinder, and takes no account of friction and 
other external losses. 

The lower drawing in Diagram No. 6 is a card 
taken from the same motor running under half 
load. 

Indicator, Use of the. An indicator consists 
of a cylinder within which works a piston under 
the tension of a helical spring of predetermined 
strength. The rod attached to the piston carries 
a pivoted arm which works on a horizontal lever. 
This lever carries a pencil bearing against a 
drum. This drum is so arranged with a spring 
that it may be partially rotated by the pull on an 
attached string. A sheet of paper is wound on 
the drum and held in place by spring clips. The 
pressure in the cylinder acting on the spring 
causes the pencil to mark the paper, the indicator 
card or diagram being traced by the forward and 
backward movement of the drum. 



194 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

The most suitable indicator for explosive 
motors is the McInneS-Dobie. It is fitted with a 
device which takes a continuous record by means 
of a rotating drum. Another device is the mirror- 
indicator of Hospitalier. 

Induction Coil. The form of coil generally 
used on gasoline cars is known as the jump-spark 
coil. It is of two types, one known as a plain or 
single jump-spark, the other as a vibrator or 
trembler coil. 

A jump-spark coil consists essentially of a 
bundle of soft iron wire, known as the core, over 
which are wound several layers of coarse or 
large size insulated copper wire, called the primary 
winding. Over this are again wound a great many 
thousand turns of very fine or small wire, known 
as the secondary winding — see also Electrical 
Ignition. 

Inlet-pipe — See Admission-pipes. 

Inlet-valve — See Admission-valves. 

Inner Tubes— See Tires. 

Insulating Material. Asbestos, lava, and 
mica arc severally used for the insulation of spark 
plugs and sparking devices. 

Vulcanized fiber or hard rubber or even hard 
wood are used for the bases of switches, con- 
nection boards, etc. 

India rubber or gutta-percha form the basis of 
the insulated covering of wires used for electrical 
purposes. The coils of small magnets or the 



THE Al^OMOBILE HAND-BOOK 195 

cores of induction coils are usually wound with 
cotton covered wire or in some instances the fine 
w're is silk covered, as in the case of secondary 
or jump-spark coils. 

Intensifier— See Spark Gap, Extra. 

Interrupter — See Vibrator Coil. 

Joint, Knuckle— See Swivel Joints. 

Joint, Universal — See Universal Joints. 

Jump-spark Coil — See Electrical Ignition, 
also Induction Coil. 

Kerosene, Use of, in Motor Cylinders. 

Kerosene injected into a motor cylinder and 
allowed to remain over night will remove all deposit 
from the piston head. It should then be blown 
out through the relief -cock or the exhaust- valve. 

Kerosene is also used to remove the gummy 
residue left on the piston and the cylinder wall 
by the lubricating oil. When injected into the 
cylinder in the manner above described, it 
facilitates the starting of the motor, if it has been 
standing idle for any length of time. 

Figure 59 shows a form of kerosene cup whicfi 
may be permanently attached to the motor. After 
removing the cap, the cup is filled and the kero- 
sene admitted to the motor cylinder by depressing 
the valve-stem. 

Kilogram— See Table No. 15. 

Kilometet— See Table No. 15. 

Knocking, Causes of. Knocking or pounding 
is an inevitable warning that something is wrong 



196 



THE AUTUMOBILli HA.NU-BOOK 



with a motor. It may be due to any of the 
following causes: 

Premature ignition: The sound produced by 
premature ignition may be described as a deep, 
heavy pound. 

Using a poor grade of lubricating oil will 
cause premature ignition. The carbon from 
the oil will deposit on the head 
of the piston in cakes and lumps, 
and will not only increase the 
compression but will get hot 
after running & short time and 
will ignite the chai^ too early, 
and thereby produce the same 
effect as advancing the spark 
too much. If this is the cause 
the pounding will cease as soon 
as the carbon deposit is removed 
from the combustion chamber. 
Badly worn or broken piston-rings. 
Improper valve seating. 
A badly worn piston. 

Piston striking some projecting point in the 
combustion chamber. 

A loose wrist-pin in the piston. 
A loose journal-box cap or lock-nut. 
A broken spoke or web in the flywheel. 
Flywheel loose on its shaft. 
If the spark plug be placed so as to be ^cactly 
m the center of the combustion space, an objectitai- 




THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



197 



Table No. 15. 
English and French Units. 



Length. 


Centimeter. 


Meter. 


Kilomettr. 


Meter 

Kilometer. . . . 
Inch 


100 
100,000 

2.539 
30.479 
160,931 


1 

1000 

.025 
.305 

1,609.3 


.001 

1 
.000025 
.000304 

1.609 


Foot 


Mile 



Volume. 


CiiWc 
Centimeter. 


Liter. 


Cubic Meter. 


Cubic Inch. . . . 
Fluid Ounce. . 

Gallon 

Cubic Foot . . . 
Cubic Yard. . . 


16.386 
29.572 
3785 . 21 
28315.3 
764,505 


.0163 
.0295 
3.785 
28.315 
764 . 505 






.0037 
.0283 
.7641 



Weight. 


Gram. 


Kilogram. 


Metric Ton. 


Grain 

Troy Ounce . . 
Pound Avs. . . 
Ton 


.064 

31.103 

453 . 593 

.091 

1,000,000 






.0311 
.4535 
907.0 
1000 


. 


.00045 
1.01605 
1 


Metric Ton. . . 



198 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

able knock occurs, which has never been fully 
explained. In some motors it renders a particular 
position of the spark control lever unusable; tliis' 
form of knock disappears either on making a 
slight advance or retardation of the ignition. 

Explosions occurring during the exhaust or 
admission stroke. This is almost always due to 
a previous misfire, and it is prevented by stopping 
the misfires. 

If the ignition is so timed that the gases reach 
their full explosion pressure during the com- 
pression stroke, that is, if the spark be unduly 
advanced when the motor is not running at a 
high speed, an ugly knock occurs, and great 
pressure is developed on the crank-pin bearing, 
wrist-pin, and connecting rod. The result may 
be the bending or distorting of the connect- 
ing rod. 

The crank -pin may not be at right angles to 
the connecting rod. Tliis cause of knock is often 
hard to find. 

The chain may perhaps be loose. This pro- 
duces a blow if the chain should jump one of the 
sprocket teeth. The noise is not usually called a 
knock because it does not recur at uniform 
intervals. It is dangerous to run with a loose 
chain, as breakage might precipitate a car down 
a hill backwards. 

The bearings at either end of the connecting rod 
may be loose. A knock during the explosion 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 199 



stroke, and also at each reversal of the direction 
of the piston. 

If the crank shaft is not perfectly at right angles 
to the connecting rod, the crank shaft and fly- 
wheel will travel sideways so as to strike the 
crank shaft bearings on one side or the other. 

Knuckle-joint — See Swivel -joints. 

Lamps — See Gas Lamps. 

Leaky Jackets — See Water Jackets. 

Leaky Joints. Leaky joints in gasoline or 
water pipes may be made tight by means of 
coarse linen or canvas, covered with a paste of 
litharge and glycerine. This should be again 
covered with a bandage of adhesive or sticky 
tape, such as is used for electrical purposes. 

Leakage of Water or Gasoline. This is 

usually due to carelessness, and indicates a 
slovenly operator. The loss of water, if small, 
may be left till the run is completed. A leakage 
of gasoline is far too dangerous to leave alone 
under any circumstances. A common cause is a 
minute hole in the float of the carbureter, 
causing it to flood. The hole can be found by 
putting the float into boiling water and watching 
for bubbles. 

Learning to Operate a Car. Learn to dis- 
tinguish normal sound of the motor and its valves, 
from the following: 

Knocking which may be due to a worn or loose 
bearing. 



200 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



The absence of explosion in one of the cylinders. 

A hissing noise due to leakage of the com- 
pression. 

A sharp spitting due to leakage during the 
explosion stroke. 

Any pounding of the admission-valve on its seat. 

Any racing of the motor. 

The sound of an unoiled or dry bearing. 

The rattle of a part becoming loose. 



tf=^ 



■^ 4^ 








LOCKING DEVICES 



Fia60 






Owing to the value of the indications from the 
above, it is important that no oil-cans, spanners, 
or other tools, should be left loose in the car. 

A little practice will enable the operator to 
distinguish the beat of the motor and the vibration 
due to the springs, from the jumping, due to road 
surface, so as to note at once: 

A broken gear tooth. 

A loose chain. 

A deflated or punctured tire. 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



201 



A broken spring. 

IneflFectual explosions due to poor compression. 
Backlash in steering gear. 
Liter — ^See English and French Units, Table 
No. 15. 

Locking Devices, for Bolts and Nuts. All 

bolts and nuts upon a motor car which are not 
provided with locking devices should be inspected 
at frequent intervals and tightened if necessary. 
The vibration and jars to which a motor car is 




subject have an astonishing way of loosening 
bolts and nuts. Figures 60 and 61 illustrate six 
different methods of preventing bolts and nuts 
from becoming loose, by means of 

A — A lock-nut, which should be a size smaller 
than the nut proper, as shown in the drawing. 

B — A headless set screw, tapped into the part 
which receives the bolt. 

C — A spring washer under the nut. 

D — A split pin through both bolt and nut. 



202 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

E — ^A split pin through the bolt only, but 
fitting in half-round grooves in the nut. 

F — A nut-lock with holding down screw. 

Loose Connections. These occur in the most 
peculiar places. Sometimes a platinum tip gets 
free from its carrying screw, sometimes a lead lug 
breaks inside a storage battery cell. Sometimes 
a disconnection occurs by breakage of a copper 
wire inside its unbroken cover — see also Battery 
Troubles and Ignition Troubles. 

Loss of Power — See Misfiring and Over- 
heating. 

Low-tension Current — See Electrical Ignition, 
also Ignition Devices. 

Lubricants, Use of. To ensure easy running 
and reduce the element of friction to a minimum 
it is absolutely necessary that all such parts should 
be supplied with oil or lubricating grease, but it 
is also a fact, not so well understood, that 
different kinds of lubricant are necessary to 
the different parts or mechanisms of a motor 
car. 

As the cylinder of an explosive motor operates 
under a far higher temperature than is possible 
in a steam engine, consequently the oil intended 
for use in the motor cylinders must be of such 
quality that the point at which it will bum or 
carbonize from heat is as high as possible. 

While a number of animal and vegetable oils 
have a flashing point, and yield a fire test 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 203 

suflSciently high to come within he above require- 
ments, they all contain acids or other substances 
which have a harmful effect on the metal surfaces 
it is intended to lubricate. 

The general qualities essential in a lubricating 
oil for use in motor cylinders include a flashing 
point of not less than 360 degrees Fahrenheit, and 
fire test of at least 420 degrees, together with a 
specific gravity of 25.8. 

At 350 to 400 degrees Fahrenheit, lubricating 
oils are as fluid as kerosene, therefore the adjust- 
ment of the feed should be made when the lubri- 
cator and its contents are at their normal heat, 
which depends on its location in the car. Steam 
engine oils are unsuitable for the dry heat of 
motor cylinders in which they are decomposed 
whilst the tar is deposited. 

All oils will carbonize at 500 to 600 degrees 
Fahrenheit, but graphite is not affected by over 
2,000 degrees Fahrenheit, which is the approxi- 
mate temperature of the burning gases in an 
explosive motor. The cylinder of these motors 
may attain an average temperature of 300 to 400 
degrees Fahrenheit. So that graphite would be 
very useful if it could be introduced into the 
motor cylinder without danger of clogging the 
valves and could be fed uniformly. These diffi- 
culties have not yet been overcome. Graphite is 
chiefly useful for plain-bearings and chains. 

The film of oil between a shaft and its bearing 



204 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

is under a pressure corresponding to the load on 
the bearing, and is drawn in against that pressure 
by the shaft. It might not be thought possible 
that the velocity of the shaft and the adhesion 
of the oil to the shaft could produce a sufficient 
pressure to support a heavy load, but the fact 
may be verified by drilling a hole in the bearing 
and attaching a pressure gauge. 

Roller and ball-bearings provide spaces, in 
which, if the oil used contains any element of an 
oxidizing or gumming nature, a deposit or an 
adhesive film forms upon the sides of the chamber, 
the rollers or balls, and the axle. This deposit 
will add to the friction, hence it is the more 
important to use a good oil or a petroleum jelly 
in such bearings. 

Air-cooled motors, being hotter than water- 
cooled, must liave a different lubricant, or one 
capable of withstanding higher temperatures. 

The effect upon animal or vegetable oils of 
such heat would be to partially decompose the 
oils into stearic acids and oleic acid Itnd the con- 
version of these, into pitch. Such oils are there- 
fore inadmissible for air-cooled motor use. 

Mineral oils are not so readily decomposed by 
heat, but at their boiling points they are con- 
verted into gas, and any oil, the boiling point of 
which is in the neighborhood of the working tem- 
perature of the motor cylinder, is useless, as its 
body is too greatly reduced to leave an effective 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 205 

working film of oil between the cylinder and the 
motor piston. 

The essentials for the proper lubrication of air- 
cooled motors are: 

That the oil should not decompose. 

That it should not volatilize, as this will result 
in carbon deposits. 

That its viscosity should be equal to that of a 
good steam engine oil at similar temperatures. 

That it should be fluid enough to permit of its 
easy introduction into the cylinder. 

That it will have no corrosive effect on the 
cylinders and no tendency to gum. 

That it will not oxidize with exposure to air 
and light. 

Lubrication, Splash and Pressure Feed. 

Some makes of vertical cylinder motors use the 
splash system, whereby oil fed by gravity from a 
tank above the level of the crank-case flows into 
the crank-case, whence it is splashed over the 
piston and the wrist and crank-shaft bearings. 
The large end of the connecting rod, which works 
in the crank-case, is made to dip or splash into a 
bath of oil. This lubricates the crank-pin. The 
splashing is invariably utilized to lubricate the 
cylinder by wetting the bottom of the piston and 
splashing into the cylinder. A little ring is some- 
times made in the crank-case, into which the 
oil collects and into which also the end of the 
piston dips. The oil usually requires changing 



206 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



every 100 miles on small motors or every 75 miles 
on large. 

Figure 62 shows a vertical cylinder motor using 
splash lubrication. 

With the use of high-speed gasoline motors, it 
has been found necessary to use a forced circula- 

tion of the oil in order to 
completely lubricate the inte- 
rior of the cylinder. The usual 
method with high-powered mo- 
tors is to employ a belt-driven 
pump to force the oil through 
adjustable conduits to the 
various moving parts. Such 
pumps, operating in ratio to 
the speed of the motor, supply 
lubricant more rapidly as the motor speed 
increases, and less as it decreases. Thus, a per- 
fect supply is maintained, on the one hand, and 
flooding of the motor is prevented on the other. 
Where horizontal cylinders are used, it is 
customary to use grease cups, and to control the 
feed by mechanical or spring pressure. Such 
devices are less suitable for vertical cylinder 
motors, which require oil in large quantities and 
exact adjustment in its flow. One very useful 
feature of oil pump lubrication is that the flow of 
oil may be kept in proportion to the speed of the 
motor. This is a very necessary feature, as 
without it flooding is liable to result. 




THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



207 



Lubricators. It should be ascertained from 
the maker of the car, how many drops of oil per 
minute are necessary for the diflferent mechanisms 
of the car, including the motor. The lubricators 
should then be set accordingly. 

It should be remembered that in cold weather 
when the oil is thick a diflferent adjustment of the 
lubricators will be necessary from that found 
suitable in warm weather. It is important that 




the lubrication should be regular, and good oil 
used, but not too much. Too much oil will foul 
the spark plugs, clog the valves, and interfere 
with the quality of the explosive mixture. For 
this reason the lubricators should always be care- 
fully closed when the car is stopped. If a 
mechanical lubricator is used, examine the 
mechanism sometimes, and do not trust entirely 
to the feed. If a pressure lubricator is used, see 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



that the pbton or cap is tight, for if not the [n«s- 
Eure will stop the lubricaUoa. 

It sometimes happens that an oU pipe or oil 
hole is stopped up and neetis cleaning, or perhaps 
the plug at the bottom of the crank chamber has 
come unscrewed and dropped out, losing all the 
oil. The proper amount of oil in the crank-case 
is about half a pint. An extra lubricator leading 
to the cylinders and crank-case should be fitted. 
so that extra oil can be ted by a hand pump, if 
there is any doubt about the motor getting 
enough. 

Figure 03 shows four forms of lubricators for 
automobile use. 

A — Plain, glass body oil cup, feeds only when 
shaft is running. 

B — Sight feed, glass body oil cup, has an 
index-arm on t(^ 
which indicates 
whether the (ul 
feed is (^ or on. 
C — Pressure 
feed, piston form 
of lubricator, for 
heavy bodied oil ; 
the oil is forced 
into the bearings by means of a spring-actuated 
piston in the lubricator. 

E> — Plain grease cup, oil or grease forced into 
the bearing by screwing down the cap. 




LUBRICATOR' 



THE AUTOMOBILE HANI>-BOOK 



A form of pressure lubricator is illustrated in 
Figure 64, in wliich a slight pressure from the 
crank-case of the motor causes the oil to be 
forced through the pipes leading to the diifercnt 
parts of the motor. This form of pressure 
lubricator is only applicable to opposed-cylinder 
motors with enclosed crank-case, as shown in the 
drawing, or to vertical two-cylinder motors with 
both pistons connected with one common crank- 
pin. 

Machine Screws, Dimensions of — See Table 
No. 16. 

Table No. 16. 

Dimensions of Machine Screws. 











11 


^ 


Dlim 


t*rotnoad. 


"3 

ll 


si 




1° 


1 


i 


a 


fc 


II 


III 


■si 




1 


& 


11 


S 


Sfi 


.084 


.053 


m 


44 


ifi 


1.1 


.13 


4 


:h« 


.110 


.062 


a?. 


34 


-22 


.20 


.17 


n 


3^ 


.136 


-082 


45 


■:'S 


.27 




.22 


H 


Sii 


,163 


-109 


:i5 


III 


:cj 


M 


.26 


H) 


^■■^ 


.189 


,135 


;«i 


M 


,37 


,35 


.30 


IV 


?4 


.219 


.144 


27 


Y 


,43 


39 


.34 






.242 




22 










Hi 


■Mi 


.268 


.182 


14 


A 


,53 


,49 


.43 


IS 


IH 


.294 


,198 


8 


n 


,58 


.52 


.47 



Manometer. A device for indicating either 
the velocity or the pressure of the water in the 
cooling system of a gasoline motor. 



210 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



Magneto — See Generator. 

Materials, Strength and Weight of- 

Table No. 17. 

Table No. 17. 
Strength and Weight of Materials. 



-See 



Material. 


Tensile 

StreDgth in 

pounds per 

square inch. 


Resistance to 
Ck^mpression. 


Weight per 
cubic inch. 


Weight per 
cubic foot. 


Aluminum 


12,000 
18,000 
23,000 
60,000 
63,000 
18,000 
30,000 
50,000 
36,000 
16,000 
18,000 
50,000 
33,000 
100,000 
63,000 
60,000 
63,000 
4,600 


10,000 
12,500 
12,000 
12,000 
30,000 
40,000 

15,666 

100,000 

80,000 

36,000 

40,666 

36,000 
36,000 
40,000 


.094 
.290 
.295 
.290 
.300 
.313 
.317 
.317 
.290 
.260 
.267 
.280 
.410 
.284 
.284 
.284 
.284 
.265 
.247 


162 

504 

510 

500! 

530 

542 

548 

548 

504 

450 

460 

480 

711 

490 

490 

490 

490 

459 

438 


Brass — Cast 


Sheet 

Bronze — Aluminum . . 

Phosphor . . . 
Copper — Cast 

Sheet 

Wire 

Gun Metal 


Iron — Cast 


Malleable 

Wrought 

Lead 


Steel— Tool 

Cr. Cast 

Mild 


C. Rolled 

Tin 


Zinc 


8,000 





Mensuration of Surface and Volume. Area 

of rectangle =; length X breadth. 

Area of triangle=baseX one-half the perpen- 
dicular height. 

Diameter of circle = radius X^. 
Circumference of circle=diameterX3.1416.* 
Area of circle — square of diameter X .7854.* 
* See Table No. 0, Areus aud Circumferences of Circles. 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 211 

Area of sector of circle = area of circle X number 
of degrees in arc -^360. 

Area of surface of cylinder .= circumference X 
length, plus the area of both ends. 

To find diameter of circle, having given area: 
Divide the area by .7854, and extract the square 
root. 

To find the volume of a cylinder: Multiply 

' the area of the section in square inches by the 

length in inches = the volume in cubic inches. 

Cubic inches divided by 1728= volume in cubic 

feet of any body. 

The surface of a sphere = square of diameter X 
3.1416. 

Volume of a spheres cube of diameter X .5236. 
The side of an inscribed cube = radius of the 
sphere X 1.1547. 

The area of the base of a pyramid or cone, 
whether round, square or triangular, multiplied 
by one-third of its heights the volume. 
[ A gallon of water (United States Standard) 
f weighs Sjj pounds and contains 231 cubic inches. 
I A cubic foot of water weighs 62 J pounds, and 
f contains 1,728 cubic inches, or 7} gallons. 
! Each nominal horsepower of a boiler requires 
\ one cubic foot of water per hour. 
\ To find the internal area of a pipe, the volume 
and velocity of the fluid or gas being given: 
multiply the number of cubic feet by 144, and 
divide the product by the velocity in feet per 



[ 



212 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



minute. The area being found, it is easy to find 
the diameter of pipe necessary. 

To find the pressure in pounds per square inch 
of a column of water of given height: Multiply 
the height of the column in feet by .434. Approxi- 
mately, every foot elevation is equal to one-half 
pound pressure per square inch. 

To find the velocity in feet per minute necessary 
to discharge a given volume of fluid or gas in a 
given time: Multiply the number of cubic feet 
by 144, and divide the product by the internal 
area of the pipe in inches. 

Metals, Melting Point of— See Table No. 18. 

Table No. 18. 
Melting Point op Metals. 



Metal. 


Temperature 
In Degrees 
Fahrenheit. 


MetaL 


Temperature 
in Degrees 
Fahrenheit 


Aluminum 

Bronze 

Copper 

Gold 

Iron — Cast 

Wrought. . 


1160° 
1690° 
1930° 
1900° 
2000° 
3000° 


Lead 


620^ 

3230<» 

1730** 

2400*» 

445** 

780<» 


Platinum 

Silver 


Steel 


Tin 


Zinc 





Mica, Use of — See Insulating Material. 

Misfiring, Causes of. Misfiring means failing 
to fire every charge that the motor takes. 

One of the most common causes of misfiring is 
an improper mixture of gasoline and air. Too 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 213 

much air or too much gasoline will cause 
misfiring. 

Batteries which are almost exhausted will give 
rise to explosions in the motor cylinder which 
seem all the more violent on account of their 
irregularity. This should be the time to switch 
on an extra set of batteries, if one is carried. It 
is perfectly useless to connect a set of exhausted 
cells with a new set, either in series or parallel, 
as it will reduce the new cells nearly to the voltage 
of the exhausted ones. 

Closing the points of the spark plug will help 
the batteries somewhat and may enable the 
operator to get the car home. 

Examine the battery and all its connections at 
the terminals, and determine whether the battery 
is exhausted or not, whether there are broken 
connections, whether the terminals or other points 
need cleaning or attention otherwise. Also 
ascertain whether the fuel is bein<j fed to the 
motor in proper quantities. It may not be getting 
enough at each charge or perhaps too much. 

Short-circuits and current leakage by contact of 
a bare place on a wire with some metal portion 
of the car, or by a spark plug with defective 
insulation will also cause the motor to misfire. 
The spark may arc or jump elsewhere than 
between the platinum points of the plug, render- 
ing a new plug or fresh insulation necessary. 

A loose connection in the primary or secondary 



214 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

circuit Ls another source of misfiring. A loose 
wire may be in contact and allow one or two 
explosions to take place. The vibration of the 
car afterwards may shake the wire loose from its 
contact and then the motor will misfire. All 
connections should be carefully cleaned and 
scR»wcd tight. 

If the spark plug is covered with soot or grease 
misfiring will often result. A spark gap device 
placed in the secondary circuit will generally over- 
come this difficulty, but prevention is better than 
cure and over-lubrication should be avoided and 
the best grade of cylinder oil used. ^ 

Mixing Valves— See Carbureters. 

Motor, Electric — See Electric Motors. 

Motor, Pour-cycle — See Explosive Motors, 
also iMuir-cvcle Motor. 

Motor, Gasoline —See Explosive Motors, also 
Gasoline Motor Constniction. 

Motors, Speed Regulation of Gasoline. To 

secure the greatest efficiency and power of the 
motor it is neccssarv' to be able to control its 
s])ce(l, and there are various ways to accomplish 
tills object. The ran<]je of speed of different 
motors varies considerably. With small single- 
cylinder motors it is necessary that the speed 
should be vcrv threat in order to secure sufficient 
power, while with two and four-cylinder motors 
this is not necessary, and consequently they are 
more durable. As a rule the speed varies from 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 215 

about 750 revolutions per minute for the latter 
to 1,500 for small motors. 

There are various methods of governing, which 
are enumerated and described herewith. 

Advancing or retarding the ignition. 

Exhaust-valve lifter. 

Exhaust-valve regulator. 

Regulating the lift of the admission-valve. 

Mechanically governing the exhaust-valve. 

Advancing or retarding the ignition. This is 
the method adopted for single and double-cylinder 
motors, and consists in changing the time at 
which the spark occurs in the combustion chamber 
by means of a small lever. If the full force of 
the explosion occurs in the combustion chamber 
at the moment when the piston is at the end of 
its stroke, its effect will be greatest. The 
duration of pressure on the piston can be reduced 
by altering the timing of the spark, so that it 
occurs after the piston has passed the end of the 
stroke. This is the simplest method, but its 
proper use depends largely on the skill and 
experience of the operator. When this method is 
adopted, a throttle is also used, which enables 
the operator to regulate the quantity of mixture, 
and alter the power of the explosion. When the 
maximum power is required, the throttle is wide 
open, and the spark advanced to the utmost. 

Exhaust-valve lifter. This operates by pre- 
venting the exhaust-valve from closing after the 



216 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

exhaust gases have escaped. When the exhaust- 
valve is held up, no explosive charge is taken into 
the cylinder. 

Exhaust- valve regulator. This method consists 
in regulating the lift of the exhaust-valve, but 
docs not prevent the valve from closing in the 
usual manner. It is also used in connection with 
the spark advance. When the maximum power 
is required, the exhaust-valve is not interfered 
with, and opens to its fullest. When less power 
is required, the exhaust- valve is prevented from 
opening as much. Consequently the exhaust 
gases are not fully expelled, and as they partially 
fill the space in the combustion chamber, a full 
charge of mixture cannot be admitted through 
the admission-valve, and the force of the explosion 
is weakened. 

By regulating the lift of the admission-valve. 
By increasing the strength of the valve spring, 
the ad mission- valve is prevented from opening to 
its fullest extent, and a full charge is not admitted 
to the combustion chamber. 

By mechanically governing the exhaust-valve. 
This is effected by preventing the cam from lift- 
ing the exhaust-valve after an explosion has taken 
place. This system is adopted on two and four- 
cylinder motors, and is the one most generally 
used on cars of European make. 

Motor, Two-cycle. Figure G5 shows a 
vertical cross-section of a two-cycle type of motor : 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



217 



that is to say, it shows the motor as it would 
appear if cut in two directly through the center. 
This type of 
motor is partic- 
ularly adapted 
to marine pur- 



Fio. 65 1 


%A..< 


N 


W . 


J 1 


-L 


B ! 

D / 


p 


F 


5 r 1 


^^^^jrj 


TWO-CYCLE MOTOR 



poses on ac- 
count of its 
simplicity, ab- 
sence of gearing 
and the slight 
knowledge re- 
quired on the 
part of the oper- 
ator to handle 
it successfully. 
This form of 
motor, how- 
ever, has not 
been found the 
most satisfactory for automobile use. Its cycle of 
operation is fully described under Explosive Motors. 
C is the crank chamber. It has two feet, or 
lugs, D as shown in the drawing, for the purpose 
of attaching it to its position in a boat or else- 
where. There is an opening at A for the recep- 
tion of the mixing-valve. The flywheel F, crank 
shaft G, connecting rod H, piston P, inlet-port B, 
baffle-plate J and exhaust-opening E, are plainly 
shown in the drawing. 



218 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

To the top of the piston P is attached a cone- 
pointed projection K. This is on the right-hand 
side and is placed there to break the electrical 
circuit between the contact-points of the igniter. 
This is effected by the cone-point K striking the 
right-hand end of the lover L, which causes the 
lever to rise at that end and fall at the other, 
thus breaking the contact between it and the 
insulated igniter terminal M. This breakage of 
the circuit causes a spark to occur between the 
left-hand end of the lever L and the point with 
which it was, a moment before, in contact. This 
action takes place once in each revolution of the 
motor and just before the piston reaches the end 
of its upward stroke. 

The ignition may be retarded or advanced by 
raising or lowering the fulcrum of the lever L, by 
means of the eccentric shown. 

The upper part of the cylinder is incased by a 
water jacket W, as is the cylinder head or 
cover N. 

While it may seem possible that the two-cycle 
motor should be capable of a higher degree of 
power, as well as a greater speed than a four- 
cycle motor, the reverse is true in its practical 
performance. It is a very satisfactory type of 
motor for low or medium speeds, and under such 
conditions it is claimed that it will develop at 
least 30 per cent more power than a four-cyde 
motor. At high speeds, such as are needed in 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 219 

explosive motors for automobile use, the objection 
to the two-cycle motor is that, all the functions of 
admission, compression, explosion and exhaust 
being in a single revolution of the motor, 
sufficient time is not allowed for the expulsion 
of the burned gases, with the result that the 
cylinder chokes itself up, and the quality of 
the mixture consequently falls below the explod- 
able point. 

While a four-cycle motor of a given power will 
run as high as 1,000 to 1,200 revolutions per 
minute, a two-cycle motor of the same dimensions 
will not nm over 750 to 900 revolutions. It is 
on this account that the two-cycle motor has so 
far not proved as successful as might have been 
expected for automobile use. 

Motor Troubles — See Battery, Carbureter and 
Ignition Troubles, also Misfiring and Overheating. 

Mud-guards. On many cars the mud-guards 
are a constant source of trouble, due to improper 
methods of attaching them to the frame or body 
of the car. The attaching bolts should be of 
large size and the irons to which the mud-guards 
are fastened should be much larger than the 
mere weight of the guards warrant. The guards 
should be strong enough to withstand any or all 
of the following conditions : 

A heavy wind pressure., especially a head or 
partial side wind. 

Motor vibrations and road jars. 



220 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

The weight of some idiot who insists on leaning 
on them when the car is standing. 

Mufl3er. The exhaust-pipe from the motor 
which conducts oflF the gases after they have done 
their work in the cylinder is connected to a 
chamber, called a muffler, attached to the frame 
of the car. The object of the muflSer is to 
deaden the noise of the escaping gases by: 

Breaking up the gases into a number of fine 
streams. 

Allowing the gases to expand and cool. 

Checking the velocity without putting t<x> much 
back pressure on the motor. 

Reducing the pressure of the gases till they are 
as nearly as possible at atmospheric pressure. 

To do this, the chamber is divided up into 
two or more compartments, and the gases in 
their passage from one to the other have to 
pass through baffle-plates or tubes, drilled 
with a number of fine holes, the combined 
area of which must be considerably in excess 
of the area of the exhaust-pipe, to allow of 
a free passage for the expanding gases. The 
flow is thus broken up and subdivided into a 
number of fine streams of cool gas at or near 
atmospheric pressure, which cause little or no 
noise on their escape into the air. It is the 
sudden expansion of the gases at a high pressure 
which causes the noise at the exhaust-opening 
of the motor. 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



221 




Figure 66 illustrates a form of muffler with a 
central inlet-pipe, provided with slotted openings 
as shown. The 
chamber is di- 
vided into two 
parts by a plate, 
in and around 
which are lo- 
cated a number 
of small tubes 
for the passage 
of the gases. A similar set of tubes are located 
in the discharge end of the muffler. 

Muffler Gut-out. A cut-out is a very desir- 
able addition to a good muffler, not only for the 
extra power gained by its use, but when adjusting 
the motor it is sometimes necessary to listen to the 
sound of the exhaust to ascertain if the motor is 
working properly. 

Needle-valve — See Valves. 

Negative Pole— See Current, Direction of, 
also Polarity. 

Nuts, Locking Devices for — See Locking 

Devices. 

Oil — See Lubricants. 

Oil Pump— See Oilers, Ratchet-feed and 
Rotary. 

Oilers — See Lubricators. 

Oilers, Ratchet-feed and Rotary. Mechanical 
or power-operated lubricators are of two kinds; 



222 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

The first has the piston or plunger cams operated 
by means of a pawl and ratchet-wheel, tlirough 
a connecting rod attached to some reciprocating 
part of the motor, or to a crank on the end of 
the cam shaft. The second form has its pump 
shaft driven by a belt, chain or gear from the 
motor. The ratchet-feed oilers are not suitable 
for motor speeds over 600 revolutions per minute, 
while the rotary oiler may be used with miotors of 
any speed by the use of a simple form of reducing 
gear. 

Overcharging — See Storage Batteries. 

Overheating, Causes of. The immediate 

effect of overheating is to bum up the oil in the 
cylinders or crank case. This causes a smell of 
burning and an odor of hot metal. There is 
sometimes a slight smoke and the motor will 
make a knocking sound. The cooling water 
begins to steam, and the car will gradually slow 
down and finally stop. 

The most serious cause of a stoppage on the 
road is overheating, which causes the lubricating 
oil to burn up and the piston to expand and grip 
or seize in the cylinder. 

Insufficient lubrication increases the friction 
between the piston and cylinder, and so generates 
extra heat. Bad or unsuitable oil may have the 
same effect. 

Too much mixture or too rich a mixture also 
causes increased heat. 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 223 

Any failure in the water circulation, unless 
detected at once, will cause overheating, the 
results of which may prove very serious. For 
this reason a careful watch should be kept on the 
manometer. If this useful device is not fitted, the 
motor and pipes should be felt by the hand. 

As soon as any of the above symptoms are 
noticed : 

The motor should be stopped at once. 

Kerosene should be copiously injected into the 
cylinders and the motor turned by hand to free 
the piston-rings. 

The parts should then be allowed to cool. 

Do not pour cold water on the cylinder jackets, 
for fear of cracking them, but pour the water 
into the tank so as to warm the water before it 
reaches the cylinder jackets. 

A simple test in the case of an overheated 
motor is to let a few drops of water fall on the 
head of the cylinder. If it sizzles for a few 
moments the overheating is not bad, but if the 
water at once turns into steam, the case is 
serious. 

Detach the spark plug or plugs, and turn 
the starting-crank slowly. This draws in cold air 
and cools the inside of the cylinder and the piston. 

Packing. Packing or material for making gas 
or water-tight joints is of various kinds. Asbes- 
tos packing comes in sheets, called asbestos paper 
or board, in the form of woven cloth, and also as 



224 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-^OOK 

string or rope. Rubber packing is made in 

slieets, either plain or with alternate layers of 

canvas and rubber. Some forms of packing are 

known as Rubberbestos and Vulcabestos and are 

made of asbestos, impregnated with rubber and 

afterwards vulcanized. 

Parts, Extra. The necessity for carrying extra 

parts upon a car becomes more apparent when a 

breakdown occurs miles away from home, and no 

material at hand to repair the break with. The 

accompanying list gives some of the parts generally 

needed in time of trouble: 

Bolts and nuts. Inner tube. Split pins. 

Chain links. Insulated wire. Sticky tape. 

Dry batteries. Packing. Valve springs. 

Extra valves. Spark plugs. Washers. 

Picric Acid. Gasoline will absorb or take up 
about 5 per cent of its weight of picric acid. 
The addition of a small quantity of kerosene will 
enable the gasoline to absorb about 10 per cent 
of picric acid. 

Picric acid is only dangerous when fused, or 
when in a highly compressed state. 

An increase in motor efficiency of about 20 per 
cent is claimed for the picric-gasoline mixture. 

About three-tenths of a pound of picric acid is 
required for each gallon of gasoline. The mixture 
should be allowed to stand for two days, agitating 
occasionally during this time, then strain through 
two or three thicknesses of very fine muslin before 
using. 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



225 



The explosive force of picric acid is very much 
overrated. If thrown upon a red hot plate of 
iron, it simply bums with a smoky flame, and 
striking a small quantity of it upon an iron anvil 
will not explode it. 

Pipe Nipples. Nipples are always ordered by 
the nominal diameter of the pipe and the over-all 
length of the nipple. Table No. 19 gives the 
standard lengths of nipples of varying diameters, 
also the number of threads per inch and the out- 
side diameter of the pipe. 

Table No. 19. 



Length of Standard Pipe Nipples. 



Nominal 
Diameter. 


Outside 
Diameter 
of Pipe. 


Threads 
per Inch. 


Over-all Length of Nipples. 


Close. 

} 


Short. 


Long. 


i 


.40 


28 


li 


2 


2i 


3 


3i 


i 


.54 


18 


i 


li 


2 


2i 


3 


3i 


f 


.68 


18 


1 


li 


2 


2i 


3 


3i 


i 


.84 


14 


li 


li 


2 


2i 


3 


3i 


i 


1.05 


14 


i| 


2 


2i 


3 


3i 


4 


1 


1.32 


11 


li 


2 


2i 


3 


3i 


4 


li 


1.66 


11 


n 


2i 


3 


3i 


4 


4i 


li 


1.90 


11 


If 


2i 


3 


3i 


4 


4i 


2 


2.38 


11 


2 


2i 


3 


3i 


4 


4i 



226 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

Pipe, Wrought Iron— See Tabic No. 19. 

Pistons. The piston used in a gjusoline motor 
cylinder is of the single-acting or trunk type. It 
is made of an iron casting wliich is a good work- 
ing fit in the cylinder. Around the upper end of 
the piston three or four grooves are cut, and in 
these grooves the piston-rings fit. The rings are 
made of cast iron, and the bore of the ring bein^ 
eccentric to its outer diameter, there Ls a certain 
amount of spring in them, and so pressure is 
caused against the cylinder wall, preventing any 
of the expanding gases passing the piston. 

'^riie lubrication of the piston-rings is verj' 
important, for on that depends the proper work- 
in«( of the piston in the cylinder. In single- 
cylinder motors, the piston-rings require frequent 
attention, and kerosene should be injected into 
the spark plug opening at frequent intervals. 
Oeeasionallv the cylinder should be token off, 
and the rings cleaned with a brush and kerosene. 
In nmlti-cvlinder motors, this constant attention 
is not riHjuired, for in addition to the splash 
system of lubricaticm, usually, there are pipes 
leading to the cylinders, through which oil is fed 
and so keeps them well lubricated. The speed 
of the motor being so much less, there is no 
danger of the oil being usal up rapidly. 

Piston Displacement. The piston displace- 
ment of a motor is the volume swept out by the 
piston, and is ec|ual to the area of the cylinder 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 227 

multiplied by the stroke of the piston. The 
expression, cylinder volume, is sometimes con- 
founded with the term piston displacement. This 
is erroneous, as the cylinder volume is equal to 
the piston displacement, plus the combustion 
space in the cylinder head. 

Pistons, Length of. For vertical cylinder 
motors the length of the piston should not on any 
account be less than its diameter, while a length 
equal to one and one-quarter or even one and 
one-third diameters is better. For motors with 
horizontal cylinders the length of the piston, in 
any case, should not be less than one and one- 
third diameters, and if possible one and one-half 
diameters or over. 

Piston-rings. To ensure proper cf):npressir>n, 
it is absolutely essential that the [)istc)ri-rings 
should be kept lubricated; consecjuently when the 
motor has been idle for some time, the com- 
pression at the start is often poor. Any failun; 
in the lubrication while running will, of four^e, 
have the same eflfect, such, for example, as in the 
case of overheating, or when the su[)ply is inter- 
mittent. Sometimes the piston-rings get stuf-k in 
their grooves with burnt oil, through overheating, 
and the compression escapes past tlnTn. 
Thorough cleaning with kerosene and fresh lubri- 
cating oil will settle the matter. In motors wh<»re 
the rings are not pinned in positicm, the slots may 
work round so as to coincide, in this caM; they 



228 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

will have to be moved around. Sometimes burnt 
oil may, apparently, have the opposite effect on 
piston-rings, for by causing the piston to grip in 
the cylinder, it will produce considerable resist- 
ance, and the operator might erroneously think in 
consequence that his compression is good. In 
every case, after a long run, a little kerosene 
should be injected into the cylinders to clean the 
rings. 

Piston-rings, Method of Tnniiiifr. a 

pattern should be made from which to cast a 
blank cylinder or sleeve with two projecting 
slotted lugs on one end to bolt same to face plate 
of lathe. This blank should first be turned off 
outside to the required diameter, making it, of 
course, sufficiently larger to allow for the cut in 
the rings, after cutting from the blank. The 
blank should then be set over eccentric sufficiently 
to allow the thick side of the rings to be twice the 
thickness of the thin side after turning. The 
inside of the blank can then be bored out, and 
the rings cut off to the exact thickness required 
with a good sharp cutting off tool. A mandril or 
arbor should be made with two cast iron washers 
or collars to fit on it, one fastened to the mandril 
and the other loose, with lock nut on mandril 
with whicli to tighten up the loose collar. After 
the rings have been sawed open and a piece cut out 
the recjuired length, they can be placed in a coUar 
or ring about 1-32 to 8-G4 of an inch laiger than 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 229 

the cylinder bore, and slipped on to the mandril 
one at a time of course, with the loose collar and 
nut oflf the same. The loose collar and nut can 
then be put on the mandril, the ring clamped 
tightly between the two collars, the mandril put 
in the lathe and the ring turned oflf, without leav- 
ing any fins or having to cut the ring oflF after- 
ward as is done in many cases. This is the 
only way in which a perfectly true ring can be 
made. 

Piston Velocity, Limitation of. The speed 

of rotation of an explosive motor is limited by the 
fact that the velocity of the piston must be con- 
siderably less than the rate of combustion of the 
explosive mixture, in order that the motor may 
develop energy or do work. The practical limit 
of piston velocity is said to be between 14 and 16 
feet per second. 

Plain-bearing Axles — See Axles. 
Plain-bearing Hubs— See Hubs. 

Platinum. The contact points of the vibrator 
of an induction coil should always be of platinum. 
German silver or any other metal spoils the 
quickness of the break on account of the greater 
tendency of the contact-points to carbonize, when 
of any other metal than platinum. Spark plug 
points should also be of platinum or iridio-plat- 
inum, which is better yet, as it is more capable 
of withstanding the intense heat in the combus- 
tion chamber than the platinum itself. Any 



230 THE AUTOMOHILE HAND-BOOK 

other metal than platinum (except gold) will turn 
green or black if tested with nitric acid. 

Points to Learn. If a motor does not ignite 
its first charge there is a cause for it, and no 
amount of turning of the crank will locate it. A 
little common sense will not only locate but 
remove the cause, and the motor will do its own 
turning after the first two or four revolutions. 

See that every charge the motor takes in is 
exploded, for which a proper mixture and a good 
spark are necessary. 

Never throttle the mixture so closely that the 
motor cannot get a full charge every time it needs 
it. 

Always use the very best cylinder oil in the 
cylinder, and a good quality of lubricating oil in 
the crank case. 

Learn how to properly adjust the vibrator of 
the coil. 

Learn how to set the valve gear correctly. 

I^eam how to locate and remedy loss of com- 
pression in the motor. 

Learn how to fix a bearing or piston which has 
seized. 

Always throw the clutch, throttle or spark- 
advance levers in gradually. 

Buy a densimeter, and learn how to test the 
quality of the gasoline. 

Learn how to grind in the valves, also how to 
fit new piston-rings. 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 231 



Never leave the car with the motor running. 
A slight touch of the clutch-lever may cause the 
car to run away. 

See that the water-cooling system has a drain- 
cock so that the water can be drained in the 
winter. 

Once a month wash out the pipes, water jacket 
and water tank with a strong solution of 
common soda or lye. Let the motor run a few 
minutes before emptying the solution, then 
empty the tank and pipes and repeat the opera- 
tion with clean water. This process will tend to 
insure uniformly effective circulation of the water. 

Never pour gasoline near a naked flame. It is 
safer to extinguish all except electric lights, when 
filling the gasoline tank of a car. 

Always remember that gasoline is a highly 
volatile and inflammable liquid and its vapor is 
far more inflammable when mixed with air. 

If the motor works well, leave it alone, although 
it may never seem speedy enough. 

Points to Remember. That if a motor 

nearly stops and then goes on again, it is due to 
lack of gasoline at the carbureter. There is 
probably dust, dirt, or other deposit at the inlet 
of the carbureter, which, however, sometimes 
frees itself. To avoid these troubles gasoline 
should never be poured into the tank except 
through a funnel fitted with a fine gauze strainer 
or a piece of muslin. 



232 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

That an unusual noise or squeak is evidence of 
lack of lubrication, and generally foretells a 
breakdown unless looked after at once. 

That air must always find an inlet to the gaso- 
line lank in order that the gasoline may flow out 
freely, and considerable trouble has been caused 
by the vent-hole in the cap of the gasoline tank 
becoming blocked. 

That the motor will not run unless the gasoline 
is flowing from the tank to the carbureter. 

That the motor will not start if the switch-plug 
is in your pocket. 

That the motor will not start until the switch 
is turned on. 

That there must always be good electrical con- 
nections between the battery, spark coil and spark 
plug. 

That too much lubricating oil must not be 
used. It causes: the valves to stick, a deposit 
on the spark plugs, and a poor combustion in the 
cylinder. Excess of lubricating oil reveals itself 
in the form of smoke at the exhaust. 

When the motor is in proper working order » 
and turned with the crank, a considerable resist- 
ance should be felt at every alternate back stroke 
of the piston. This back pressure should require 
a considerable effort to overcome when the crank 
is turned slowly. If the compression of any 
cylinder is poor, that cylinder will not give it9 
full power, 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 233 



Finally, remember that if your motor is misfir- 
ing or not running properly, the trouble may of 
its own accord disappear after a little running. 

Polarity. To ascertain the polarity of the 
terminals of a storage battery or light circuit, 
place the ends of the wires on the opposite ends 
of a small piece of moistened litmus paper. The 
wire on the side of the paper which has turned 
red is the negative pole of the battery — see also 
Current, Direction of. 

Porcelain. Porcelain tubes used for the insu- 
lation of the center rod of a spark plug, have 
higher insulative properties than lava or mica, 
but on account of the liability of the porcelain to 
break from too sudden change of temperature, it 
is not as reliable as other forms of insulating 
material. 

Positive Pole — See Current, Direction of, also 
Polarity. 

Power, Loss of — See Misfiring and Over- 
heating. 

Power Transmission Devices. The power 

transmitting devices or mechanisms used on 
gasoline motor-cars may be divided into three 
classes : The Differential gear which transmits 
the power from the speed-change-gear to the 
rear-axle or wheels of the car. The Priction- 
clutch which forms the connecting and discon- 
necting medium between the motor and the speed- 
change-gear. The Speed-change-gear which 



234 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

transmits the power of the motor to the tlifferentiid 
gear at varying speeds, entinly independent of 
the motor speed. 

DiFFERENTiAi, GfiJAHS. The differential gear of 
a motor-car acts in a similar manner to the 
whipple-tree of a two-horse wagon, the difference 
being tliat the differential gear acts continuously 
in a rotary manner, while tlie whipple-tree acts 
only through a short horizontal range of move- 
ment. It may also be compared with the equal- 
izing bars of the locomotive driving whecU. 

Two forms of bevel gear differentials are shown 
in Figure 67. The one at the left of the drawing 



Fig. 67 




DIFFERENTIAL GEAR 



has a jspur fp'ar drive, and is nmch used on 
electric cars with motors <lireetly attached to Hie 
rcar-iixlc. The dilTcrcntial at the right of the 
dnnviiig has a spj-oeket wheel instead of a gear, 
through which tlic gear is driven. 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



Figure 68 illustrates two spur gear differentials. 
The left-hand one having an internal tooth spur 
gear and fixed sprocket wheel, while the right- 



Fig. 68 




DIFFERENTIAL GEARS 



hand differential lias all external tooth spur gears, 
and may be fitted with either a sprocket wheel 
or a spur gear form of drive. 

Friction- CLUTCHES. Friction-clutches are of 
various forms, amongst these may be mentioned 
those which are generally used on gasoline motor- 
cars; they are: The external band-clutch, the 
internal expanding-ring clutch, the disk or end- 
plate clutch and the cone-friction form of clutch. 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



Fig. 69 




CLUTCH 



The female member of the cone-friction clutch 
is usually an integral part, or attached to the rim 
of the motor flywheel, A form of cone-friction 
clutch is shown in Figure 69, in which the female 
member is attached 
to the rim of the fly- 
wheel by bolts. The 
driving engagement is 
effected by the pres- 
sure of a spring lo- 
cated around the 
extension of the fly- 
wheel shaft, and be- 
tween the hub of the 
flywheel and that of 
the male member of 
the clutch. Disengagement of the clutdi members 
is made by foot pres.sure on a pedal attached to 
the bell-crank lever shown to the right in the 
drawing. 

Speed-ciiaxge-geaus. The gears which 
effect the change of speed of motor-cars, inde- 
{x'ndently of that of the motor, are of many 
varieties, among which may be mentioned the 
following: Planelary-gears, Internal -gears, In- 
ternal-clutch gears, Sliding^ears and Positive- 
clutch gears. 

A planetary or epicj-clic form of speed-change- 
gear is illustrated in Figure 70, which has two 
speeds forward and a reverse. The fast speed is 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 237 

obtained by means of the disk or plate-friction 
clutch shown at the left in the drawing, which 
locks the parts of the gear together so that it 



Fig. 70 




PLANETARY GEAR 



revolves with the motor shaft as a single unit. 
When on the slow speed the reverse gears are in 
action, but at a slower rate of speed than the 
forward motion of the device. 

Figure 71 shows a form of internal planetary 
speed-change-gear, also having two speeds for- 
ward and a reverse. The fast speed is obtained 
in the same manner as the gear described in 
Figure 70, When the gear is running on the slow 
forward speed, the internal gear of the reverse is 
running backwards at nearly the same rate of 



238 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

speed as the slow forward gear, a Teature which 
lias many objections. 

A speed-change-gear having internal or indi- 
vidual clutches in each change-gear, Ls shown in 





Fro. 71 


II 




i 


HL 


L_ i 


P 


i 


T 


w 



INTERNAL GEAR 



Figim' 73. These clutches are operated one at a 
thne by means of the cones on the ends of the 
grooved collars, engaging with the d<^ attached 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 23ft 

tothe male members of theclutches. Thereverse 
is obtained by means of an idler pinion shown 



Fig. 72 




'— ' CLUTCH GEAR 



between the two gears at the right in the draw- 
ing. Figures 73 and 74 show two forms of 
speed -change-gears with spur teeth which slide in 
and out of mesh with each other, hence the term, 
sliding-gear. The gear shown in Figure 73 lias 
a device by which the cone- friction -clutch is 
thrown out of gear, before the various pairs or 
sets of gears are engaged or disengaged with each 
other. Both speed- change-gears have three 
speeds forward and a reverse. 
Prony Brake— See Brake Tests. 



240 THK AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

Pumps, Water CirctUating. If steam is seen 
coming from the relief or outlet of the water 
circulating system, look for a blockage of the 
circulation or failure of the pump. 

If some of the radiator tubes are cool and 
others are hot, look to the pump. 



Fig. 73 




SLIDING GEAR 



To test the pump before starting, run the 
motor for a few minutes. Then ascertain how 
long it takes before the top radiator tubes are 
thoroughly hot. If the heat of the pipes is 
uniform the circulation is all right. 

The circulating pump is used in the belief that 
it affords a means for regulating the temperature 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 241 

of the jacket water supply, which would not 
always be the case with a thermal -syphon system. 
Such is not the case, as the pump, being driven 
direct from the motor, operates at a speed which 
varies with the motor speed. On starting the 



""'^-^^ li\^ ^ 


M 


"■^^^flplt-ftjfi— 


TV 




It^ 


\^^S¥ft 


SLIDING GEAR 


-ir 



motor, it pumps cold water into the jacket. It 
pumps slowly at slow speeds, although the motor 
may be taking a full charge and heating rapidly. 
It pumps fast at high speeds, although the wind 
pressure and its consequent cooling effect may be 
very great. If a circulating pump could be used 
in connection with a device to control the regu- 
lation of the motor temperature, the results would 
be more satisfactory. 

Rotary pumps used in the water circulating 
system of gasoline automobile motors are of two 
forms, centrifugal and positive or forced-feed. 



242 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



Fig. 75 




PUMP 



A positive or forced-feed rotary pump is shown in 
Figure 75. An annular ring around the pump 
shaft carries two blades, one of which is hinged 
to, and the other attached directly to the pump 

shaft. The 
outer ends of 
the blades are 
supported in 
the peripheiy 
of the annular 
ring and rotate 
eccentrically 
with it. The 
pump shaft is 
concentric with 
the pump 
chamber, but the annular ring is located eccen- 
trically around the shaft, which drives it by 
means of the fixed blade on the shaft. 

Figure 76 illustrates another form of positive- 
feed rotary pump, in which the pump shaft is 
eccentrically located in the pump chamber. A 
short cylinder which forms a part or portion of 
the pump shaft, carries two blades in a slotted 
opening parallel to and coincident with the axis 
of the pump shaft. These blades are kept in 
contact with the interior periphery of the pump 
chamber by means of coil springs, located 
between the blades as shown. Rotation of the 
cylinder in the pump chamber causes a sliding or 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



243 



reciprocating action of the blades, due to the pres- 
sure of the coil springs between their inner ends. 

Radiator, Combination Water Tank and — See 

Radiators, Water-cooling. 

Radiators, Water-cooling. The design of a 

radiator should be such that the maximum of 
surface is ex- 
posed to the 
air and the 
greatest free- 
dom afiForded 
for the circu- 
lation of the 
water. As a 
^circle presents 
the minimum 
surface , it 
would appear 

that a circular pipe is not the best shape for 
a radiator tube. There are, however, many 
reasons in favor of the circular section, one of 
which is the small resistance offered to the flow 
of the water. With a circular shape the minimum 
weight of tube is obtained for a given cubic 
content of liquid, and the greatest strength also 
for a given weight. A flattened tube section is 
often used, and is made up to represent in appear- 
ance the cellular radiators which have recently 
come into use. If the cellular radiators are well 
made, they have the advantage of being more 




1^44 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



easily cleaned of mud than any other design. 
The number of joints forming a honey-comb radia- 
tor are likely to be a cause of leakage, and such a 
radiator is far more difficult to repair on the road 
than the tubular type with radiating fins or disks. 




Radiator, Cooling Surface per Horse- 
power. Motors using the thermal-syphon or nat- 
ural water circulation require about 5 square feet 
of radiating or cooling surface per horsepower. 

Radiator, Combination Water Tank and. 

Four styles of combination water tank and radiator 
are shown in Figure 77, having vertical cooling 
tubes with radiating disks, honey-comb or cellular 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 245 

form of radiation and horizontal tubes, respec- 
tively. 

Ratchet-feed Otter — See Oilers. 
Rear Axles— See Axles. 

Regulation, Speed — See Governor, also 
Motors, Speed Regulation of Gasoline. 

Relation of Spark to Mixture. The relation 

of the time of the spark to the mixture is best 
learned by experience, but most .always the 
highest speed will be obtained when the throttle 
is fully open and the spark well advanced. It, 
however, happens on bad roads and hills that the 
best results are sometimes obtained by retarding 
the spark a little, leaving the throttle full open. 
With the thi'ottle almost closed and the 
spark fully retarded, the motor will just run 
itself. Do not open the throttle suddenly, as the 
mixture will be more uniform if the throttle is 
opened gradually. 

Do not advance the ignition until the motor is 
up to speed on the throttle. Advancing the 
spark suddenly, or before speed is attained with 
the throttle will cause pounding. Always advance 
the spark after the throttle is full open. 

Rheostat. A rheostat is a device for regulat- 
ing the flow of current in a closed electrical 
circuit, by introducing a series of graduated 
resistances into the circuit — see Electric Motors, 
Speed Regulation of, also Storage Battery 
Charging. 



246 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

Road Troubles. Aside from tire troubles and 
accidents which may happen to a horse-drawn 
vehicle as well as a motor-car, any one of the 
following troubles may occur: 

Motor misfires badly. 

Motor overheats. 

Motor almost stops and then starts. 

One or more cylinders not firing. 

Regular but unusual hissing. 

Regular but unusual knocking or pounding. 

Regular but unusual puflSng noise. 

Motor Misfires Badly. With a single- 
cylinder motor this may be due to the fact that 
the points of the spark plug are too far apart, or 
that oil or soot has got on them. Misfiring in a 
multi-cylinder motor is caused from weak or 
exhausted batteries, a loose or broken wire in 
the ignition circuit, or a poor contact at the 
commutator. This applies also to a single- 
cylinder motor. 

Motor Overheats. A failure in the water 
circulaticm from lack of water in the tank or an 
obstruction in the pipes is one cause of overheat- 
ing. An insufficient supply or shortage of lubri- 
cating oil is another. Too rich a mixture or too 
iiuicli gasoline for the (juantity of air also causes 
overheating, especially by running slow under a 
heavy load. 

Motor Almost Stops and Tiient Starts. 
The gasoline tank intiy be almost empty or the 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 247 

cock in the supply pipe partially closed. The 
gasoline may be of low grade or stale. There 
may be dirt in the gasoline which has partially 
clogged the pipe leading to the carbureter. The 
union or flanged connection between the car- 
bureter and the admLssion-pipe may be loose, 
allowing air to enter, thus preventing proper 
carburation of the mixture. 

One or More Cylinders Not Firing. The 
points of the spark plugs may be too far apart; 
if not, they may be short-circuited by oil or soot. 
If the motor has individual lubrication for each 
cylinder, too much oil may be feeding, defiling 
the mixture and preventing ignition of the charge. 
Stop the working of the vibrators of the coils, 
one at a time. In this manner the cylinder 
which is not firing may be quickly located. 

Regular but Unusual Hissing. This is 
due to a leak in the compression. Fill an oil can 
with soapy water and apply round the spark plug 
opening and the inlet or exhaust- valve chambers. 
Air bubbles will indicate the location of the leak. 
If the starting-crank be turned quickly the hiss- 
ing noise will sometimes locate the leak. 

Regular but Unusual Knocking. This 
sometimes is an indication that a piston or a 
bearing on the motor is about to seize through 
overheating. Advancing the ignition too far will 
produce the above result. A broken valve-stem, 
valve-spring, or a loose or worn wrist or crank- 



248 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

pin bearing will also cause a knocking or 
pounding. 

Regular but Unusual Puffing. K a 
puflSng noise is heard which keeps time with the 
exhaust of the motor, but does not in any way 
affect the running of the motor, the connection 
between the motor and the main exhaust-pipe has 
worked loose, or there is a crack in the pipe. K 
the main exhaust-pipe is all right, one of the 
branch exhaust connections to the motor may be 
loose. U" 

Roller-bearing Axles — See Axles. 

Roller-chain — See Chain. 

Rotary Oiler — See Oilers. 

Rubber, India. All articles made of com- 
mercial rubber should be kept from contact with 
oil, kerosene, gasoline or grease if they are to be 
kept in good condition. Vulcanized rubber 
should not be exposed to a temperature of more 
than 130 degrees, Fahrenheit. Commercial or 
vulcanized rubber contains not to exceed 30 to 
35 per cent of pure india rubber, as its stretching 
quality, stickiness and rapid deterioration under 
the action of light and air make its sole use 
undesirable. 

Runabout. This term is applied to light 
gasoline or electric cars, weighing not to exceed 
1,000 pounds, and with a seating capacity for two 
persons. Typical American gasoline and electric 
runabouts arc illustrated in the Frontispiece. 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 249 

Running Gear. A complete running gear 
includes the frame, springs, wheels, motor, speed- 
change-gear, axles and the machinery of the car 
except the body. The French word, chassis, is 
sometimes used to designate a running gear, but 
its use is not correct, as strictly speaking the 
term, chassis, applies to the frame only, or at the 
most to the frame and springs. 

Figure 78 illustrates a vertical section of a 
running gear equipped with a vertical four- 
cylinder motor, and longitudinal propeller-shaft 
drive, by bevel gearing to the live rear axle. 

A plan view of a running gear with double side- 
chain drive and rigid rear axle is shown in Figure 
79. The motor is also of the vertical four- 
cylinder form. The water cooling system in both 
cases is by rotary pump, combination tank and 
radiator, and fan as shown. 

Scratched Cylinder. The cylinder may be 
temporarily fixed by taking it to a first-class tin- 
smith and having the scratches filled with silver 
solder. The soldered places must be then care- 
fully scraped flush with the bore of the cylinder. 
The best way is to have the cylinder re-bored and 
the piston-rings re-turned. 

If the scratches are not too deep the cylinder 
can be re-bored, and a new set of piston-rings 
made to fit the new bore. The limit to such an 
increase in bore is about one-sixteenth of an inch. 

Screws, Cap — See Cap Screws — Table No. 8. 



THE ArTOMOlSII.L: HANlVItfKiK 




THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 251 

Screw-driver, Uses of a. A screw-driver is 

one of the handiest and most useful tools on a 
car. It can be used to grind in a valve, to press 
a valve spring out the way, or to hold a valve 
spring up while the spring cap is being put on. 
It may also be used as a chisel to tighten a loose 
nut, which otherwise cannot be got at. 

Secondary Current. The current which takes 
its rise in the fine wire of the induction coil, and 
which flows through the wire to the spark plug, 
is induced in the fine wire by the sudden reversal 
of the magnetism of the iron core. 

This change of magnetism is caused by the 
sudden interruption of the primary current— see 
also Electrical Ignition and Induction Coil. 

Self-firing, Causes of. If the motor should 

continue to run after the switch has been opened, 
it is due to an insuflScient supply of lubricating 
oil, causing the motor to overheat, or to the pres- 
ence of soot or some projection in the combustion 
chamber becoming incandescent. It may also be 
due to lack of water or to the water circulation 
working poorly, causing the motor to overheat. 
Self-induction — See Electrical Ignition, also 
Induction Coil. 

Side-slip of Motor-cars. A wheel with a 

weight on it when rotating bites into fresh ground 
as it advances. If the wheel rotate more in 
proportion than it advances, from any cause, it 
thereby loosens the particles of dirt beneath it 



252 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 




THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 253 

and loses adhesion with the ground immediately 
under the dirt. 

The wheel can now slip sideways as easily as 
it can slip forwards, particularly when it has the 
rounded section slightly flattened, which is the 
case with pneumatic tires. When traveling 
straight ahead, and with the motor out of gear, 
skidding does not usually occur. A slight turn 
given to the steering. wheel checks the speed and 
introduces a side pressure on both front and rear 
wheels, due to the machine tending to continue 
its path in a straight line. Generally this side 
pressure will not cause skidding. If, however, 
the motor be suddenly thrown in gear, or the 
brakes suddenly applied, or, what amounts to the 
same, a large turn is given the steering wheel, the 
wheels find themselves either rotating more than 
in proportion to their advance or advancing more 
than in proportion to their rotation. Tliis 
immediately causes a loss of adhesion, which, once 
established, causes the car to skid or side-slip. 

Silencer — See Muffler. 

Skidding — See Side-slip of Motor-cars. 

Solder. Silver solders are generally used for 
very fine work. They are very fusible, and non- 
corrosive. Hard spelter is used for steel and iron 
work, and soft spelter for brass work. 

When copper is soldered to iron or zinc, resin 
should be used, or if chloride of zinc is used for 
a flux, the joint should be washed afterwards to 



254 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

remove the acid. Unannealed wires should be 
soldered at as low a temperature as possible. 
Solder is always an alloy of other metals. It 
must not only be more fusible than the metal or 
metals to be joined, but it must have some 
chemical affinity for them. Different kinds of 
solder are therefore employed for different pur- 
poses. It is called either hard or soft, aceoiding 
to its fusing point. 

Solders and Spelters for use with different met- 
als, and their proportional parts by weight are 

Solder for: 

Electrician's use ...1 — Tin, 1 — Lead. 

Gold 24— Gold, 2— Silver, 1— Copper. 

Platinum 1 — Copper, 3— Silver. 

Plumber's— Hard . . 1— Lead, 2— Tin. 
Soft ...3— Lead, 1— Tin. 

Silver — Hard 1 — Copper, 4 — Silver. 

Soft 1— Brass, 2— Silver. 

Tin— Hard 2— Tin, 1— Lead. 

Soft 1— Tin, 1— Lead. 

Spelter for: 

Fine brass work. . . .8 — Copper, 8 — Zinc, 1 — Silver. 

Common brass 1 — Copper, 1 — Zinc. 

Cast iron 4 — Copper, 3 — Zinc. 

Steel 3— Copper, 1— Zinc. 

Wrought iron 2 — Copper, 1 — Zinc. 

Spark Coil — Sec Electrical Ignition, also Induc- 
tion Coil. 

Spark Gap, Extra. An extra spark gap in 
the sccondarv circuit will cause a spark to jump 
across the points of a fouled plug because the 
intensity of the voltage of the current is reduced 
to such an extent that the current will jump 
across the points in preference to the path of 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 255 

higher resistance formed by the carbon deposit 
upon the insulation of the spark plug. As the 
spark plug and the spark gap are in series with 
each other, it follows that with a single gap — the 
spark plug alone — ^the tension of the secondary 
circuit is about 30,000 volts, while with two gaps 
the tension at each gap will be only about 15,000 
volts. That this statement is true may be shown 
by an arc light circuit of 500 volts, with five 100- 
volt lamps in series with each other in the circuit, 
and which have a potential of 100 volts each, and 
not 500 volts, as might be supposed. This 
explanation, therefore, destroys the claim that the 
use of the extra gap intensifies the arc or spark 
at the points of the plug. The real advantage of 
the extra gap is that the reduction of the voltage, 
instead of its increase, reduces the tendency of 
the current to arc across the carbon deposit. 

The extra spark gap will only be found effec- 
tive so long as the carbon deposit upon the 
insulation of the spark plug is small, or mixed 
with oil, which increases the resistance of this 
path. The arcing will continue at the point of 
the plug until the carbon deposit is rich enough 
to form a path for the entire volume of the 
current, when the plug will cease sparking — but 
the extra spark gap will continue to arc. One 
advantage of the extra spark gap is that it provides 
a means of seeing whether the secondary circuit 
is in working order without removing the plug 



266 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

from the cylinder, and the device should be < 
nected in the circuit by a two-point switcl 
enable it to be thrown in and out of the secom 
circuit. The use of the extra spark gap 
never absolutely remove the necessity for kee] 
the insulation of the spark plug in good condi 
and free from soot or oil. As long as 
batteries are strong enough to maintain the 
voltage of the primary circuit, just so long 
the extra spark gap work successfully in 
secondary circuit, and when the electromo 
force of the batteries falls below the nor 
point, it will be found necessary to cut out 
extra spark gap, to maintain an eflScient spar] 
the combustion chamber of the motor. 

Spark Intensifier — ^See Spark Gap, Extra 
Spark Plugs. The trouble with motors i 
firing, is generally due to dirty spark plugs. T 
is caused by using too much cylinder oil, whi 
when subjected to the intense heat in 
cylinder, turns to carbon. Tliis carbon depo 
on the insulated porcelain and the body of 
plug, and instead of the current jumping fi 
the point in the body to the point in the porcel 
and making a spark, it follows the easiest pj 
which is the carbon, and does not make a sp 
at the plug points at cill. When this occurs 
motor will misfire. The first thing to do w 
a motor misfires is to test the spark plug. T 
the motor until the battery circuit is clos 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



257 



Unscrew the spark plug from the motor, tlien 
re-connect the wire to it just the same as it was 
before. Lay the metal part of the plug body on 



E other unpainted part of the 




the flywheel or s 
motor, being 
careful that the 
metal part of 
the plug body 
only touches 
the motor and 
that the porce- 
lain part is 
clear. If . the 
spark jumps in 
short jerks be- 
tween the inner 
end of the por- 
celain and the 
interior of the 
plug body it 
is sooted and 
needs cleaning. 
If it jumps at 
the points as it 
should do, the 
trouble is elsewhere; probably at the battery, 
loose connecting wires, or the vibrator of the 
coil is not properly adjusted. 

To clean a spark plug properly use a 50 per 
cent solution of hydrochloric (muriatic) acid. 



SPARK PLUGS 



A — Platinum point. 
B— Thread. 
C— Plug body. 
D — Bushing. 
B— Insulated terminal. 
F — Porcelain bushing. 
G — Expansion spring. 
H — Asbestos washer. 

K — Assembly nut. 



258 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

washing the points of the plug with a tooth 
brush, occasionally dipping the plug into the 
a<:id. After cleaning the spark plug in thia 
manner rinse it in water. 

Spark Plugs, Constraction of. Two spark 
plugs are shown 
in Figure 80. 
which, while 
differing radi- 
cally in their 
construction, 
effect the same 
purpose, tliat 
of producing a spark or arc in the combustion 
chamber of the motor. The accompanying table 
and n'ferencc to Figure 80, will fully explain the 
construction of the spark plugs. 

Cross-sections of four different forms of spark 
plugs are shown in Figure 81. All are con- 
structed with 
a view to make 
the outside or 
extraneous path 
caused by soot- 
ing, as l»ng as SPARK PLUG 




FiG. 82 



to prevent if possible .short-circuiting of the plug 
from tliis cause. 

Figure 8% shows a fonn of sparit plug 
in which two extra air-spaces are provided, 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 




SPARK PLUG 



Fic. 63 



one between the center rod or terminal and 
the porcelain bushing, and the other between the 
porcelain bushing and the shell or body of the plug. 

The spark plug shown in Figure 83 has a closed 
chamber around and over 
the center insulated rod or 
terminal, this chamber is a 
part of the body of the 
plug and forms the other 
terminal of the plug. It 
acts as a small combustion 
chamber and streams of 
fire are supposed to be 
thrown from the small open- 
ings in the chamber, when 
the arc or spark occurs 
therein. 

.\n exterior view of a 
form of spark plug in gen- 
eral use is shown in Fig- 
ure 84. 



SPARK PLUG 



260 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

Spark plugs of American manufacture are 
made with three different sizes of threads : One- 
half inch pipe-size, the actual outside diameter of 
which is 84-100 of an inch, with 14 threads per 
inch. Three-quarters of an inch diameter, with 
18 threads per inch, and 7-10 of an inch diameter, 
with 17 threads per inch. The last named one 
is the French or Metric standard thread. 

Specific Gravity. In the absence of a proper 
instrument, the specific gravity of gasoline or 
any other liquid may be obtained as follows : 

Weigh a certain quantity of distilled water at 
4 degrees Centigrade, or 39^ degrees Fahrenheit. 

Weigh the same quantity of gasoline or other 
liquid under test. 

Divide the weight of the liquid by the weight 
of the water, and this will give the required 
specific gravity of the liquid. 

The specific gravities of various liquids are as 

follows : 

Alcohol at 15° C 0.794 

Acid, nitric 1 . 217 

Acid, sulphuric 1 .841 

Ether at 15° C 0.720 

Naphtha 0.848 

Oil, linseed 0.94 

Petroleum 0.878 

Gasoline at 15° C 0.680 to 0.720 

Water, sea, at 4° 1 .026 

Water, pure, at 4° 1.0 

Speed-change Gear — See Power Transmission 

Devices. 

Speed, Cyclic Variation of. The cyclic 

irregularity of any reciprocating-piston motor is 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 261 

defined as the ratio of the diflFerence between the 
maximum and minimum velocity in any one 
revolution to the mean velocity. The great 
diflSculty in measuring this ratio is the continual 
variation in the mean velocity. One system of 
measurement uses a tuning-fork, which traces a 
wavy line on a smoked cylinder attached to the 
motor shaft. Another apparatus consists of a 
disk attached to the motor shaft, and a fljrwheel 
turning freely on the same axis. The disk and 
flywheel are geared together by a planetary 
gearing, whose axis, perpendicular to that of the 
fljrwheel, carries a pencil point tracing on a rotating 
drum. The flywheel is turned through the 
planetary gearing, and takes up the mean speed 
of the motor. As it is too heavy to follow the 
cyclic variations in speed of the disk, these cause 
the axis of the planetary gearing to move back- 
ward and forward round the axis of the disk, and 
the pencil point therefore traces a periodic curve 
on the drum. This curve, however, does not 
give the difference in velocity, but the relative 
change in position of the disk and flywheel, and 
the maximum difference in velocity must be 
calculated from the two steepest tangents to the 
curve. This apparatus is troublesome in the 
calculation of results and is not sufficiently 
sensitive for small irregularities. An apparatus 
constructed on the principle of the von Altencck 
transmission dynamometer is also used for this 



262 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

purpose, a pulley attached to the motor shaft 
being connected by a belt to a fljrwheel, which 
takes up the mean velocity of the motor; the 
variations in velocity produce variations in the 
tension on the two sides of the belt, and an index 
is arranged to measure these. The elasticity of 
the belt renders this apparatus unsuitable for any 
absolute measurements. Another device consists 
of a heavy cylinder, mounted on an axis fixed to 
the motor shaft by ball-bearings; the friction in 
these causes it to take up the mean velocity. A 
frame fixed to the shaft embraces the cylinder, 
and carries a pencil point which is free to move 
along the cylinder. A string attached to the 
pencil passes over a pulley to a sleeve running 
free on the axis; if this be held still, the string 
winds up on it, and pulls the pencil along the 
cylinder. As the motion of the cylinder is uni- 
form, while the pencil follows the irregularities 
of the motor, the latter traces a curve, from 
which the cyclic irregularity can be reckoned. 
This apparatus was found to work well, but was 
not sufficiently sensitive for small irregularities. 

The only method which has been found capable 
of measuring a very small irregularity is to 
employ a small independently excited dynamo 
driven by the motor, and take its curve of volts 
by means of a Joubert contact-maker and poten- 
tiometer. As the volts arc proportional to the 
speed, this gives also the curve of speed of the 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



263 



motor. If there be no irregularities in the dynamo 
voltage due to its construction, this method is 
capable of giving very accurate results, but it is 
troublesome and unsuited for practical work. 

Speed in Miles per Hour. The following 

table gives the speed in miles per hour, from 27.69 
to 120 miles per hour, for a mile covered in any 
given interval of time in minutes and seconds, 

between 2:10 and 0:30. 

Speed in Miles per Hour. 



•2 




•2 




-a 








5|| 






al 


^ GO 09 


2s. 




■3l 


l|i 

2:10 


Si>eed 
Miles 
Hour. 


a fi o 

1:38 


Speed 

Miles 

Hour. 


1:15 


Speed 

Miles 

Hour. 


52 


Speed 

Miles 

Hour. 


27.69 


36.73 


48.00 


69.23 


2:05 


28.80 




37 


37,11 


1:14 


48.65 


51 


70.58 


2:00 


30.00 




36 


37.50 


1:13 


49.32 


50 


72.00 


1:59 


30.25 




35 


37.89 


1:12 


50.00 


49 


73.47 


1:58 


30.51 




34 


38.29 


1:11 


50.70 


48 


75 . 00 


1:57 


30.77 




.33 


38.71 


1:10 


51.43 


47 


76.59 


1:56 


31.03 




.32 


39.13 


1:C9 


52.17 


46 


78.26 


1:55 


31.30 




:31 


39.56 


1:08 


52 . 94 


45 


80.00 


1:54 


31.58 




:30 


40.00 


1:07 


53 . 73 


44 


81.82 


1:53 


31.86 




:29 


40.45 


1:06 


54.54 


43 


83.72 


1:52 


32.14 




:28 


40.91 


il:05 


55.38 


42 


85.71 


1:51 


32.43 




:27 


41.38 


1:04 


56.25 


41 


87.80 


l:5r 


32.73 














1:49 


33. C3 




26 


41.86 


1:03 


57.14 


40 


90.00 


1:48 


33.33 




25 


42.35 


1:02 


58.06 


39 


92.31 


1:47 


33.64 




24 


42.86 


1.01 


59 . 02 


38 


94.74 


1:46 


33.96 




.23 


43.37 


1:00 


60.00 


37 


97.29 


1:45 


34.28 




■22 


43.90 


59 


61.02 


36 


100.00 


1.44 


34.62 




21 


44.44 


58 


62.07 


35 


102.86 


1:43 


34.95 




20 


45.00 


57 


G3.16 


34 


105.88 


1:42 


35 . 29 




19 


45.57 


56 


64 . 28 


33 


109.09 


1:41 


35.64 




18 


46.15 ! 


55 


65 . 45 


32 


112.50 . 


1:40 


36.00 




17 


46.75 


54 


66.67 


31 


116.63 


1 :39 


36.36 




16 


47.37 

1 


r>3 


67 . 92 


30 


120.00 



264 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

Speed of Oasoline Motors. In explosive 

motors the products of combustion diminish in 
about the ratio of the increase of speed. The 
pressures and temperatures at admission and 
exhaust are variable, and depend on the speed 
and the mean temperature of the cylinder wall. 
The compression pressure decreases in proportion 
to the increase of speed, owing to the diminished 
volume of mixture at higher speeds. If it were 
not for this the power of a motor of given bore 
and stroke would go up in the same proportion 
as the speed. 

An automobile motor diflFers fundamentally 
from the stationary form by reason of its being 
required to run at variable speeds. If the valves 
are well designed, nearly the full volume of 
gas should be taken in at higher speeds and the 
compression will actually improve at higher 
speeds owing to the diminished time for leakage 
round the piston-rings. This tends to improve 
the fuel economy of the motor. 

Speed of Wheels— See Table No. 20. 

Speed Regulation of Motors— See Motors, 
Speed Regulation of Gasoline, also Electric 
Motors, Speed Regulation of. 

Spontaneous Ignition — See Self-firing. 

Springs. The length and number of leaves 
in the springs of motor cars of similar weight and 
power vary, and without any reason for so doing. 
The general use of pneumatic tires hides many 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAN&-BOOK 



imperfections in this respect as well as in others. 
Springs of insufficient strength are a source of 
great danger, and frequent examination should 
be given to them. Springs are not necessarily of 
insufficient strength because they appear to be 
light. Short springs are not desirable, as they 
are more liable to break than a longer spring, 
the deflection per unit of length being greater. 
Stiffness in short springs is usually avoided by 
lightness, which is likely to lead to breakage, 
especially when the hole for the bolt through the 
center of the spring is made larger than neces- 
sary. 

Table No. 20. 

Revolutionb per Minute op Wheels for 

Vaktinq Speeds. 





Miles yer hour. 


2 

as 




S 


10 


15 


20 


23 


30 


40 


24 


11^ 


14ft 


210 


^Sft 


aso 


420 


^m 


26 


?fi 


fi? 


78 


10,1 


V?<\ 


1114 


■.W8 


3.^3 


J^SH 


.117 


2S 


?4 


4fl 


7^ 


m 


IW 


ISI) 


?4n 


ann 


am 


4ftft 


30 


■i-> 


45 


fi7 


1M) 




HiS 


■i-i^ 


2K0 


;i;i(i 


44H 


33 


■>f\ 


41 


fil 


s? 


i(i:^ 


153 


■.>04 


'•.?■?. 


31 m 


4(18 


36 


\t 


sr? 


.-ifl 


v,s 


ta 


141) 


1W7 


■?~t4 


•>S(1 


.174 


42 


IB 


32 4s 


fj4 


so 


120 


itw 


2U(I 


240 


320 



Springs, Dimensions of. In calculating the 
dimensions and elastic limit of springs for motor- 
car use, the elastic limit must be carefully c'on- 
, sidered with regard to the dead and maximum 
loads to be carried by the car. The dead load 



266 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 




is the weight of the car when at rest. The 
maximum load is the greatest weight that can 
possibly be carried with good spring action. The 
springs to retain their elasticity should have 
their ultimate strength far beyond their maximum 
load capacity. 

Springs, Suspension of. Apart from certain 
figures on the dead weight of the load and the 

proper size and 
tensile strength 
of the springs, 
there is no infor- 
mation regard- 
ing the proper 
method of hanging the springs for motor-cars. 
This must continue to be governed largely by 
experiment, since the usual construction of motor- 
cars, renders necessary the use of devices known 
as distamre rods, to maintiiin a fixed distance 
between the motor and the rear axle, as the 
defle(,'tion of the springs would otherwise permit 
it to be disturbed. The usual method of con- 
struction is to set the springs lengthwise of the 
car, as in this manner most of Ihe violent jars arc 
absorbed, and the fixed relation of the motor and 
the rear axle are maintained, without rigid 
connections. 

Spring-buffer. A cushioning device, intended 
lv> eliiniiialc or rcMnove the bouncing action of the 
springs of a motor-car, when passing over humpa 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



267 



or depressions in the road surface at a high rate of 
speed, is illustrated in Figure 85. A flat coiled 
spring is attached to arms or links, one of which 
is hinged to the center of the spring and the other 
to the frame of the car. 

Spring-hangers — See Body-hangers. 

Sprockets. The circular instead of the linear 
pitch is often erroneously used in calculating the 
pitch diameter of a sprocket wheel. Reference to 





SPROCKET 



Fig. 86 




Figure 86 will illustrate the difference between 
circular and linear pitch, and help to demonstrate 
the case more clearly- The view at the left of 
the drawing shows the circular pitch and the 
view at the right the linear pitch of a gear or 
sprocket wheel respectively. If the circular pitch 
of the gear be one inch and the gear has six 
teeth as shown, the pitch diameter will be 6X 
0.3183, which gives 1.91 inches as the pitch 
diameter* Let the linear pitch of the sprocket be 



268 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



also one inch, and with six teeth as before. 
In a sprocket having 6 teeth, the radius is 
equal to the linear pitch, as the figure is com- 
posed of six equilateral triangles, and the pitch 
diameter of the sprocket wheel is consequently 2 
inches. 

Sprockets, Dimensions of. Table No. 21 

gives the pitch diameters of sprockets for roller 
chain of 1 inch, li inch and Ij mch pitch, with 
7 to 28 teeth. The outside diameters may be 
found by adding the diameter of the roller to the 
pitch diameter of the sprocket — see Chain. 

Table No. 21. 



Dimensions of Sprockets for Roller Chain. 



Number of 
Teeth In 
Sprocket. 


llnch 
Pitch. 


IM Inch 
Pitch. 


m Inch 
Pitch. 


Pitch Dia. 


Pitch Dia. 


Pitch Dia. 


7 


2.31 


2.88 


3.46 


8 


2.61 


3.27 


3.92 


9 


2.92 


3.65 


4:38 


10 


3.24 


4.04 


4.85 


11 


3.54 


4.44 


5.33 


12 


3.86 


4.83 


5.79 


13 


4.18 


5.22 


6.27 


14 


4.50 


5.62 


6.75 


15 


4.81 


6.01 


7.22 


16 


5.12 


6.41 


7.69 


18 


5.76 


7.21 


8.64 


20 


6.39 


7.99 


9.59 


22 


7.03 


8.79 


10.56 


24 


7.66 


9.58 


11.49 


26 


8.31 


10.38 


12.44 


28 


8.95 


11.19 


13.42 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



260 



Squares of Numbers — See Table. 



Squares op 


Numbers from 1 


TO 8}, Advancino by 




\ OF ONE INCH. 






i 


£ 




i 


m 

U 


i 




^ 


E 


a 


£ 




E 


:3 


a 


p 


s 

1 


S 


. 1 
3 


1 


5 




s 
7 


c? 


1.000 


9.000 


25.000 


49.000 


li 


1.266 


3i 


8.766 


51 


26.266 


7i 


50.766 


IJ 


1.563 


3J 


10.563 


5i 


27 . 563 


71 


52.563 


If 


1.891 


3i 


11.391 


5i 


28.891 


7i 


54.391 


1} 


2.250 


3i 


12.250 


5i 


30.250 


7i 


56.250 


If 


2.641 


3i 


13.141 


5| 


31.641 


7i 


58.141 


li 


3.063 


31 


14.003 


5} 


33.063 


7i 


60 . 063 


li 


3.516 


3i 


15.016 


5J 


34.516 


n 


62.016 


2 


4.000 


4 


16.000 


6 


36.0C0 


8 


64.000 


2i 


4.516 


4i 


17.016 


61 


37.516 


8J 


66.016 


2i 


5.063 


4} 


18.063 


61 


39 . 063 


8i 


68 . 063 


2| 


5.641 


41 


19.141 


63 


40.641 


81 


70.141 


2i 


6.250 


4i 


20.250 


6i 


42.250 


8i 


72.250 


28 


6.891 


4J 


21.391 


6i 


43.891 


8S 


74.391 


2} 


7.563 


4} 


22.563 


6f 


45.563 


8i 


76.563 


2J 


8.266 


4} 23.766 


61 


47.266 


8J 


78.766 



Starting a Motor. The most important point 
about starting a gasoline motor is to ascertain if 
the cock in the supply pipe leading from the 
gasoline tank is open. Failure to do this has 
caused the display of more temper, profanity 
and anxiety than any other detail, except 
that of forgetting to close the switch before 
cranking the motor. Another point is to see 
that the tank has been previously filled with 
gasoline. 

Next flush the carbureter to see if the gasoline 
(lows from the tank, then give the motor one or 
two turns by means of the starting-crank and 



270 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

with the compression-release cock — ^if any — open. 
If a mechanical feed or splash lubrication is used, 
there Tv^ill be no necessity to look after the lubri- 
cation, but if a gravity oil feed is used, do not 
forget to turn on the oil before starting the 
motor. 

Never forget to retard the ignition before 
starting the motor. A back fire will result if this 
precaution is neglected, and a nasty blow, or 
even a broken wrist or arm may be the result. 
The proper way to avoid this trouble is to have 
the ignition lever spring-controlled so that the 
ignition is always retarded when the motor is not 
running. 

Starting Troubles. If the motor refuses to 
start, the trouble may be due to oil or grease on 
the spark plug points; this may be remedied 
without removing the plug, by disconnecting the 
secondary wire from the plug and placing it near 
the terminal, so as to allow an external and 
visible spark to occur. Once the motor is started 
the oil gets burned up by the heat, so that 
Ignition will continue after a permanent con- 
nection of tlie secondary wire has been made. 
Generally it is necessary to stop the motor, or 
at least the spark, to facilitate re-connecting the 
wire without receiving a shock, but if the 
motor is hot it will re-start easily. This is 
merely a temporary adoption of the extra spark 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



271 



Sometimes the motor will start readily, but 
dense smoke having a strong odor will issue from 
the muffler. This may be an indication that the 
mixture is too rich, although it is frequently due 
to an excess of lubricating oil in the cylinder. 
To correct the mixture, more air should be 
admitted to the carbureter. 

Failure of the motor to start is more often 
occasioned by too weak than by too rich a 
mixture. The 
first thing to 
do, if regulat- 
ing the air does 
not correct it, 
is to ascertain 
if the gasoline 
pipe is free 
from obstruc- 
tion. This pipe is not large, and is more or less 
crooked. A partial stoppage of the pipe will 
therefore result iri a too weak mixture. 

Water in the carbureter is not an infrequent 
cause of the motor failing to start. All gasoline 
contains more or less water, which, being heavier 
than the gasoline, settles to the bottom of the 
supply tank and finds its way to the carbureter. 
If the pet-cock at the bottom of the carbureter 
be opened, the water — which will have collected 
in the lowest part of the carbureter — will pass out 
with the gasoline, i^ 



\ 

c 


iH F.O. 87 


/' " u 


iTEERING GEAR 



272 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



d 



Fig. 88 



Steering Connections. The method of con- 
necting the steering arm of a wheel-steering device 
to the steering lever attached to the knuckle of 
one of the steering wheels of the car is shown in 
Figure 87. The ends of the steering rod are pro- 
vided with ball and socket joints. The complete 
mechanism as shown is usually known as the 
steering-gear — see Ball and Socket Joints, also 
Steering Devices. 

Swivel or knuckle-joints for connecting the 
steering arm of the wheel or lever steering 
mechanism to the arms on the knuckle-joints 
of the steering wheels are of various forms. 

Figures 88 and 89 show 
k n u c k 1 e-joints which 
may be used for the 
above purpose. They 
are of simple construc- 
tion and practically inex- 
pensive to niake. They 
may be used with any 
standard drop-f o r g e d 
jaw-ends. 

Steering Devices. 

Steering devices are of 
three types : L e V e r. 

Side-bar and Wheel-steering. The first two 
are used on some light gasoline and electric run- 
abouts, but wheel-steering in one of its many 
forms seems to predominate. Wheel-steering is 



a 



/f^ 



^j ^ ft, ^ ' 



^ 

tr 



KNUCKLE JOINT 




THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 273 

effected in four different ways, which are: Worm 
and gear — Screw and nut — Pinion and rack, and 
Pinion and quadrant. 
The first two forms are 
iireversible, that is, the 
front or steering-wheels 
of the car cannot by any 
chance move the hand- 
wheel, due to the lock- 
■ ing action of the devices. 
The last two are rever- 
sible, but on account of 
the great reduction in 
motion between the hand- 
wheel and the steering-wheels of the car, a con- 
siderable effort would be required to move the 
hand-wheel from the other end. 

Figure 90 illustrates a lever-steering device, 
with a compensating spring between the steering 
lever and the connecting rod atlached to the 
steering-wheels of the car. The compensating 
spring is supposed to eliminate alt shocks or 
jars, due to inequalities of the road. 

A worm and gear, or irreversible form of steering 
mechanism is illustrated in Figure 91. It is usually 
enclosed and the case filled with heavy oil orgrease. 

The only objection to the worm and gear lies 
in the fact that after continued use, the wear 
between the worm and gear quadrant occasions 
back-lash in the steering arm attached to the 



274 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



quadrant. The screw and split or adjustable 
nut, although a more expensive construction, has 



Fig. 90 





STEERING DEVICE 



decided advantages over the worm and gear device 
in this respect, as all back-lash due to wear may 

be readily taken 

up. 

Steering-gear 

— See Steering 
Connections. 

Steering- 
knuckles — See 
Axles. 

Stopping a 
Motor. The first 
things to do after 
stopping the mo- 
tor are: 

Shut off the 
battery switch, and reinovo the plug. 
Close all oil cups or lubricators. 




THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 275 

Shut oflf gasoline if there is no float in the 
carbureter. 

In the winter and if the car will be in a cold 
place, drain off the water from the circulating 
system. 

Wipe off the motor, and see that it is ready 
for the next run. 

When cleaning the motor examine all bolts 
and nuts, and all points needing adjustment. 

Note the condition of the journals and bear- 
ings, if they are hot ascertain the cause of 
heating. 

Storage Batteries. In order that electrical 
energy may be taken from a storage battery, a 
current of electricity must first be passed through 
the battery. A chemical action takes place on 
the active material of the plates in the cells. 
During the discharge a reverse chemical action 
takes place and the plates resume their former 
condition. Thus it is apparent that a storage 
battery, if properly made, can be used over and 
over again, without materially impairing its 
condition. On account of the chemical changes 
involved, the whole of the energy required to 
charge a battery is not available as useful current. 
Consequently, in determining the size of battery 
to be used, its efficiency at various rates of 
charge and disdjai^^c^ must he taken into con- 
sideration. 

Battery Capacity. The capacity of a battery 



276 THK AUTOMOBILE HANU-BOOK 

depends on the number and size of the plates 
composing the elements of the ceU. Increasing 
the number of plates increases the capacity, but 
does not increase the voltage of the cell. 

The capacity of a battery is expressed in 
ampere-hours. As an example, a particular cell 
will, on discharge, give twenty-five amperes for 
eight hours, or it has a total capacity of 200 
ampere-hours, when discharged at its normal rate 
of eight hours. If discharged at a higher rate, 
say five or tliree hours, the total capacity will be 
considerably less. For example, the above cell 
will discharge at the rate of thirty-five amperes 
for five hours, gi^^ng a total capacity of 175 
ampere-hours, or it will discharge at the rate of 
fifty amperes for three hours, giving a total 
capacity of 150 ampere-hours. 

Watt-hour CAPAcrrr. The watt-hour 
capacity of a batter^' depends on the density of 
the electrolyte used. Up to a certain point, the 
higher the specific gravity of the electrolyte used, 
the greater will be the capacity. Care should be 
exercised not to permit the batteries to be dis- 
charged too low, or to remain idle for any con- 
si dcrahlo length of time without being thoroughly 
re-charged. 

Electrolyte. The electrolyte used in a 
storage batter}- is matle up of three to four parts 
of water to one part pure sulphuric acid. Noth- 
ing except distilled water should be used. Freshly 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 277 

caught rain water may be used in ease distilled 
water cannot be obtained. Although it is con- 
siderably cheaper, never use commercial sulphuric 
acid, as it will ruin a battery in a short time, 
due to the presence of iron in the commercial 
acid. Chemically pure acid only should be 
used. 

Specific Gravity. The electrolyte should 
have a specific gravity of 1.25, this is usually 
written as 1250. The specific gravity of a solu- 
tion is determined by the use of a hydrometer, 
which is an instrument so designed that the zero 
of its scale is on a level with the surface, when 
immersed in pure or distilled water. The hydrom- 
eter will rise until the 25 degree mark is about 
on a level with the surface, when sufficient acid 
has been added to raise the specific gravity to 
1250. The electrolyte should always cover the 
top of the plates at least one-half of an inch, 
and, when fully charged, should be tested every 
few weeks with the hydrometer. 

Voltage. A storage battery has a normal 
electromotive force of about two volts and an 
internal resistance so low as to be negligible in 
all ordinary calculations, consequently the voltage 
across the terminals of a number of storage cells 
in series will be equal to the combined voltage of 
the individual cells and will in most cases remain 
practically the same, irrespective of the quantity 
of current which is flowing from the battery. 



278 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

A storage battery will work equally well on 
either an open or closed circuit, it will give out 
a small or large current continuously or in- 
termittently, and under practically the same 
voltage. 

Charging. The voltage of the charging 
circuit should be at least 20 per cent higher than 
the voltage of the storage battery. Always use 
a direct current, as an alternating current cannot 
be used. If possible, a storage battery should 
always be charged at its normal charging rate, or 
preferably at a slower rate, for the slower a 
storage battery is charged, the greater will be its 
discharge capacity. The normal charging rate 
is usually taken to be four to five hours, irre- 
spective of the capacity of the battery. Charge 
the battery until the voltmeter shows 2.6 volts 
while the battery is in the charging circuit. 

Charging Connections. When charging a 
storage battery, it is of great importance that the 
connections with the charging circuit be properly 
arranged. That is, the positive pole of the 
circuit should always be connected to the positive 
pole of the storage battery. 

Quick Charging. Sometimes it is desirable 
to charge a battery (juickly, in order to save 
time, when far from home with an electric 
car wluxse batteries are almost exhausted. As 
a general rul(\ such a ])r()ce(lure should not be 
adopted unless the storage battery is practically 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 279 

discharged, and then only when in the hands 
of an expert. 

Discharging. In driving an electric car the 
battery should be nursed as much as possible, on 
steep hills and rough roads. If the amperage 
rises abnormally when going up a steep hill it is 
better to tack from side to side than to go 
straight up the hill. 

If the voltmeter shows a fall below 1.75 per cell, 
it does not necessarily indicate that the battery is 
exhausted or injured. The car should be stopped 
for a few minutes, when the normal voltage will 
again be shown. If this occurs often, however, 
the battery should be examined by an expert. 

Storage Batteries, Care of. On receiving 

batteries unpack the cases carefully, opening them 
from the marked side. Clean oflf all excelsior or 
dirt that may have collected on the cells or 
trays. 

Examine each connection carefully to see that 
none have been broken through rough handling 
in transit. If any are broken have a tinsmith 
solder the connection firmly, or when possible, 
have a lead-burned connection made. 

Unscrew the stopper of each cell and see that 
the electrolyte covers the tops of the plates in 
each cell from one-half to one inch. If it does 
not more electrolyte should be added. 

The electrolyte is made by mixing chemically 
pure sulphuric acid with distilled water until 



280 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

the specific gravity, when the liquid is cold, is 
about 1250. 

The proportion of acid to water is about one 
part of the former to three and one-half parts of 
water. 

Always add the acid to the water, not water 
to the acid. Heat is always evolved in adding 
acid to water and the electrolyte should always be 
allowed to thoroughly cool before adding it to cells. 

Always use distilled or rain water, as other 
water is liable to contain iron or other salts 
injurious to plates. 

Do not use distilled water from an ice plant, as 
it is almost sure to contain ammonia. The 
presence of the following substances in the electro- 
lyte tends to destroy the plates: Chlorine, iron, 
copper, and the nitrates. 

If any of the rubber cells have been broken or 
cracked in transit remove the cell from the tray 
at once, cutting its connection with the other 
cells, and order a new one in its place. 

It may be determined whether a cell is leaking 
by adding more electrolyte, if it is found to be 
below the tops of the plates. After adding the 
electrolyte until the tops of the plates are covered, 
if in a short time the electrolyte is found to be 
lowering or below the plates again, the cell is 
imperfect. 

Charging. Always have the batteries exposed 
to a free circulation of air when cliarging, remov- 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



ing the stoppers or vents to allow of the free 
escape of the gases. 

Charge the battery at the normal rate specified 
until the electrolyte boils in the cells and the 
voltmeter indicates that each cell is giving 2.6 
volts while the current is passing through the 
charging circuit. If the cells get hot reduce the 
charging rate one-half. 

Discharging. In order to obtain the best 
results the battery should never be allowed to be 
dischai^ed to a voltage lower than 1.75 and if 
possible it should be stopped at 1.8 volts per cell. 

Table No. 22 gives the weight, general dimen- 
sions and discharge rate for storage batteries of 
from 45 to 145 ampere-hour capacity. 
Table No. 82. 



a 
SI 

il 


Ou.s>.eDi^en^.. 


Di,e..r«einHoor.. ■ 


1 


If 


si 


1 


t 


1 
s 


1 
S 


9 


s« 


H 


10 


i 










,=> 






10 


7 
B 


■ti 


3* 




Ifi 


ft 




i 


10 


6» 


4| 


31 












12 


HI 


6 


41 




.■l 




3 


10 


14 


iti 


Vi 


l>i 




a 




4 


10 


17 


IH 


St 


m 












19 


i:ii 


K 


7» 








6 


10 






10 




81 


3 


10 


14} 9i 


71 


tl 



Storage Battery Charging. When charging a 
storage battery the strength of the charging 



282 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

current should {ilways be in proportion to the 
aniporc-hour capacity of the battery. 

'I'lie voltage of the charging circuit should be 
at least 20 per cent higher than the maximum 
voltage of the batt::iy when fully charged. 

When a storage battery is fully charged it 
should show !2.() volts per cell, and the fact that 
the battery is fully charged will be indicated by 
an apparent boiling of the liquid and a free dis- 
charge of gjises from the cells. 

When charging storage batteries, great care 
should be tak(Mi to have the doors of the body 
open, as while charging a great deal of hydrogen 
gas is thrown off, and no spark, lighted match or 
naked flame of any kind should be brought near 
tlie car during the process of charging. 

When cliarging at high rates, great care 
should he taken not to heat the cells. If at any 
time tli(* cells show a tendency to heat while 
charging, the charging current should be 
immcdiatelv reduced. 

If at anv time the batteries will not retain their 
charge alter being fully charged, it is an indication 
that lliev are short-circuited. This is due to 
sediment settling so rapidly in the bottom of the 
cell that it touches the bottom of the plates in the 
cells. Nothing will tend to destroy a battery 
(juicker than to try to opc^rate it in the above 
condition, and whenever a battery shows an 
indication of not hohling its charge, or falling far 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 283 

below its normal capacity, it should be inspected 
without loss of time. 

Do not attempt to charge the battery at a high 
rate unless it is completely discharged, as the rate 
of charge that the battery will take is dependent 
upon the amount of energy already absorbed by 
the battery. 

When charging a battery at a high rate, under- 
stand as near as possible the condition of the 
battery, as the high rate should only be used 
when the battery is completely discharged. 

Always charge the battery promptly after using 
the car. Nothing will depreciate the battery 
capacity so much as to leave it standing dis- 
charged for some length of time, except using the 
batteries without the proper amount of solution 
in them. The solution should at all times extend 
above the top of the plates. 

The charging circuit should always be supplied 
with a volt meter, ampere meter and rheostat. 
In this way the voltage of the battery can always 
be measured, or the amount of current it is 
desired to put into the batteries, can be 
measured by the ampere meter and the amount 
varied as desired by the use of the rheostat or re- 
sistance. 

The cost of a charging outfit depends upon the 
size and capacity of the battery to be charged. 
One charging outfit is capable of charging one 
car several times a day or several cars a day. 



284 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

A 60-ampere-hour storage battery charged from 
a 110-volt light cu*cuit at a rate of 15 amperes, 
would require 4 hours to chaise and would con- 
sume in that time from the light circuit, 110 volts, 
multiplied by 15 amperes, or 1,650 watts per 
hour, which, multiplied by 4 hours, would be 6,600 
watts, which, at 10 cents per thousand watts, 
would cost 66 cents. The cost per mile for 
operating an automobile would then simply be 
figured from the number of miles that a 60- 
ampere-hour storage battery would run the car. 

A simple storage battery charging outfit is 
illustrated in Diagram No. 7. Before inserting 
the charging plug into its receptacle on the car, 
always be sure that the controller lever is in the 
off position. After attaching the charging plug to 
the car, throw the rheostat lever over to its starting 
point, so that all the resistance is in the circuit, 
then close the jack-knife switch and regulate the 
charging current by means of the rheostat, until 
the proper charging rate given by the battery 
makers is reached. The charging of the batteries 
should always be done according to the instruc- 
tions given by the makers of the car or bat- 
tery. 

Storage Battery Troubles. The principal 
troubles to which a storage battery is subject are 
as follows: 

Short-circuits. One form of trouble that 
may occasionally happen to a battery is short- 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



circuiting. It is sometinies caused by the active 
material scaling o£F and falling between the 
plates, or by sediment in the bottom of the cell. 
Should a foreign substance fall between the plates 
when the cell Is open, that is sufBcient in many 



CHARGING OUTFIT 




DIAGRAM 



No, 7 



esses to cause trouble. Should trouble be 
suspected, it may be discovered by the marked 
difference in color of the plates or the specific 
grav ity of the electrolyte, as compared with the 
other cdb. No particular damage will be caused 



286 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

if the trouble is discovered and removed at 
once. 

Corrosion. Corrosion of the plates may occur 
from the chemical action due to the electrolyte 
decomposition of dilute acid in the pores of the 
active material, or the presence of lead-dissolving 
acids or their salts in the electrolyte. 

The corrosive action of liquids on metals 
immersed in them takes place with the greatest 
rapidity at the surface of the liquid, and storage 
battery plates which project above the surface of 
the electrolyte deteriorate at its surface before the 
submerged portions of the plate have greatly 
depreciated. The plates should always be com- 
pletely covered with electrolyte, and the lugs 
which pass from the plates out to the terminals 
made of thick, rolled lead. 

SuLPiiATiNG. The causes of sulphating are 
over-discharge or too rapid discharge, either of 
the entire active material of the plates or only 
certain portions of it, and the injurious eflFecLs 
are thoi-e which arise from great increase in 
resistance and excessive expansion. 

liOcal action will cause sulphating, as will 
also short-circuits between the positive and 
negative elements of the cell. 

As the sulphate is white in color, its presence 
is indicated by the gradual lightening in color of 
the sulphated parts of the plates. 

Local Action. Internal discharge or local 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK! $87 

action is another source of trouble. The remedy 
is to use pure electrolyte and keep the plates well 
covered. Local action often results in filling the 
pores of the active material with impurities and 
sulphate, thereby reducing the capacity of the 
cell. 

Loss of electrolyte by evaporation should be 
made up by proper addition of dilute acid, about 
5 per cent of acid to 95 per cent of distilled water. 
If the electrolyte does not completely cover the 
plates a smaller portion of the active material is 
exposed, and the cell capacity proportionally 
decreased. 

Buckling of the Plates. Fracture and 
buckling of the plates is due to excessive or 
unequal expansion. It indicates that the dis- 
charge has been carried too far, the rate too 
rapid, or the current distribution over the plate 
not uniform, and that certain portions of the 
plates were too far or too rapidly discharged. 

Loss OF Active Material. liOss of the 
active material cannot be prevented if the active 
material is improperly formed or applied, and is 
of such composition that it disintegrates or loosens 
from the plate. Loss of the active material 
occurs, however, to a limited extent, due to too 
rapid expansion and contraction, which the plate 
cannot follow, or to the too rapid formation of 
gases when charging is done at a high rate, or 
the battery is over- charged. 



288 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

Excessive Discharge. Excessive or over- 
discharge tends to sulphate the exterior of the 
plates, which prevents the inner portion of the 
active material from participating in the discharge 
and causes the action to take place on the portion 
forming the outer layer, which results in over- 
discharge of the surface of the plate and the 
formation of a non-reducible sulphate. 

Loss OF Voltage. This occurs frequently in 
a battery, one or more cells showing a lower 
voltage than the rest, and at times their polarity 
may even be reversed. This diminished voltage 
is due to surface sulphating of the active material 
in the plates, which must be removed. 

Strength and Weight of Materials — See 

Materials — Table No. 17. 

Structural Shapes. Table No. 23 gives the 
general dimensions, weight per foot and safe load 
for one foot of length, for angle, channel and tee 
sections of the minimum weight of each section 
rolled. 

The safe loads given in the table are for a 
uniformly distributed load, on a beam, one foot 
in length between its points of support. 

For a single center load the safe loads given in 
the table must be divided by two. 

Example: What should be the safe uniformly 
distributed load for a 2 X 2 X j\ angle, the points 
of support being 5 feet apart? 

Answer: Reference to the table shows that a 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 289 

2 X 2 X x\ angle, one foot long between its points 
of support, will carry a safe load of 1,330 pounds. 
Therefore 1,330 divided by 5, equals 2(}Q pounds 
as the safe uniformly distributed load for th? 
angle. 

Example: What safe center load will a 2Xf 
channel carry, the points of support being 7 feet 
apart? 

Answer: The safe load given in the table is 
2,800 pounds, this divided by 2 and by 7, gives 
200 pounds as the safe center load. 

Example: What size of tee iron will be 
necessary to carry a safe uniformly distributed 
load of 500 pounds, the points of support being 6 
feet apart? 

Answer: The safe load required, multiplied 
by the distance between the points of support, is 
equal to 500 multiplied by 6, which gives 3,000 
pounds. Reference to the table shows that a 
2jX2i tee will carry a safe load of 3,4G5 
pounds. 

The safe loads given in Table No. 23 are based 
on a maximum fiber stress of 60,000 pounds for 
steel, with a factor of safety of 6 to 1, giving a 
safe fiber stress of 10,000 pounds per square 
inch. 

To ascertain the safe uniformly distributed load 
for a beam of any section given in the table, 
divide the safe load given by the length of the 
beam in feet. 



290 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



Table No. 23. 

Dimensions, Weight and Safe Loads of 
Structural Shapes. 



S'aape of 


Section in 


Weiffht per foot 


1 
Safe load for one 


section. 


inches. 


in inches. 


foot of length- 




Uxljxi 


1.00 


325 




lixlixi 


1.20 


510 




l}xl}x^ 


2.10 


850 • 


Angle 


2 x 2 x A 


2.40 


1,330 


1 


2J X 2i X J 


3.60 


2.130 


2ix2ixi 


4.00 


2,665 




3x3x i 


4.90 


3,865 




lixi 


1.30 


1,000 




lix i 


1.45 


1,330 


Channel 


2x } 


2.60 


2,800 


c 


3 X 1/ff 


4.00 


7,260 


4x1/, 


5.25 


12,660 




5x1} 


6.50 


19,300 




6x1}? 


8.00 


28,860 




' UxlJ 


1.55 


485 




U x li 


1.90 


730 


Tee 


1} X 1} 


2.33 


865 


T 


2x2 


3.50 


1,665 


2i X 2\ 


4.12 


2,200 




■ 2ix2i 


5.40 


3,465 




, 3x3 


6.60 


5,930 



Substances, Weight per Cubic Foot of — See 

Table No. 24. 

Supplies Necessary on a Car. The following 

supplies will be found very useful, especially on 
a long trip: 



Asbestos. 

Bolts and nuts. 

Copper wire. 

Emery cloth. 

Emery powder. 

Funnel. 

Gasoline (extra can). 



Gaskets. 
Iron wire. 
Machine screws. 
Rope (small, strong). 
Rubber pail. 
Sticky tape. 
Washers. 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



291 



Table No. 24. 

Weight per Cubic Foot of Substances. 



Materials. 



Ash, White 

Asphaltum 

Brick — Pressed. . . . 
Common . . 
Cement — Louisville 
Portland 

Cherry 

Chestnut 

Clay, Potter's 

Coal — Anthracite . 
Bituminous . 

Coke 

Earth 

Ebony 

Elm 

Flint 

Gold, Pure 

Hemlock 

Hickory 

Ice 

Ivory 

Lignum Vitae .... 

Magnesium 

Mahogany 

Maple 

Marble 






« 



Materials. 



o 



38 
87 

150 

125 
50 
90 
42 
41 

110 
93 
84 
26 
95 
76 
35 

162 

1204 

25 

53 

58, 

114 
83 

109 
53 
49 

168 



i Mercury 

ijMica 

||Oak, White 

! Petroleum 

Pine— White . . . . 
Northern. . 
Southern. . 

Platinum 

ijQuartz 

Resin 

rSalt 

i'Sand — Dry 

I Wet 

! Sandstone 

■ Shale 

Silver 

iSlate 

Spruce 

Sulphur 

7 Sycamore 

Tar 

Peat 

Walnut, Black. . . 

Water— Distilled. 
Sea 

Wax, Bees 



43 

xi 



CO 

•a 






o 



849 

183 

50 

55 

25 

34 

45 

1342 

165 

69 

45 

98 

140 

151 

162 

655 

175 

25 

125 

37 

62 

26 

38 

62J 

64 

60i 



Swivel-joints — See Steering Connectioas. 

Tachometer. A tachometer is an instrument 
for indicating the number of revolutions made by 
a machine in a unit of time — usually one minute. 

Tanks, Capacity of Cylindrical. To ascer- 
tain the capacity in gallons of a cylindrical tank 
of given length, multiply the area of the cross- 
section of the tank in square inches by the length of 




292 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



the tank in inches, and divide the product by 231, 
the result will be the capacity of the tank in gallons. 

Tanks, Combination Radiator and Water- 
See Radiators. 
Tanks, Gasoline and Water. Do not put 

the water in the gasohne tank by mistake, as many 

a new beginner has done. 
Always use a wire gauze- 
lined funnel. Although 
the drain of most tanks 
is usually a cock, the inlet 
is more often a screwed 
cap, this cap gets lost, 
and is often replaced by 
a cork. If this is done 
in the case of the gasoline 

tank the results from powdered cork getting 

into the carbureter and small 

pipes, is sure sometime to 

give rise to almost endless 

trouble. 

Always fill or measure the 

contents of the tanks before 

starting. When filling the 

water tank after it has been 

emptied, do so with the drain- 
cock open for the first few 

minutes so as to force out 

any air bubbles which might get into the pump, 

or in a bend in the pipes, and put a stop to 





THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 2»3 

the water circulation. This is known as an air- 
lock. 

In case that there may be difficulty in ascer- 
taining the level of the gasoline in the tank, gauge- 
cfocks may be fitted in the side or end of the gaso- 
line tank. Figure 92 shows a form of gauge-cock 
suitable for this purpose. 

To determine the exact quantity of water in 
thie tank, a gauge-glass as shown in Figure 93 is 
well suited, as the water level may be seen at a 
glance. In case of accidental breaking of the 
glass, the cocks at the top and bottom of the 
gauge may be closed. 

Tap-drilla— See Table No. 25. 

Table No. 25. 



DiHKNBtoKa OF Tap-driixs for 


Standard V-Threadb. 


Frou } to 1} 


NCHEB. 


S'S 


Ill 


ill 


li^i 




1 


20 


.16.1 


ii 


f. 


;; 


18 


.210 


i. 


i 


16 


,267 


5 


1 




14 


.314 










12 


.35a 








■ ' 


12 
11 


41S 
.46S 










10 


.577 




1 




8 


.683 


i 


1 




1 


8 


.784 


s 


1 




1! 


7 


,878 
1.003 


.' 


ll 



M4 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

Tensile Strength ' of Materials— See Table 
No. 17. 

Tee Iron — See Structural Shapes. 

Terminala. With storage battery termitials, 
corrosion is inevitable unless the lead and brass 
parts are, when new, taken apart, and carefully 
painted with raw linseed oil or vaseline, and 
.screwed up again. The entire binding-post may 
be drenched in linseed oil, it will not only 
prevent corrosion, l)ut, strangely enough, improve 
the electrical contact between the wirea and the 
faces of the terminals. 

Two forms of terminals or binding-posts are 
shown in Figure 94. The one shown at the left 




TERMINALS 




in the tlrawing is more suitable for inductiou coil 
and dash-board connections. A tip or connector 
is also shown for use with tliis terminal, which 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 295 



gives a far better electrical contact, than by the 
ordinary method of inserting the bared end of the 
insulated wire in the terminal itself. The bared 
end of the wire is sweated into the hole in the 
smaller portion of the connector as shown, the 
sheath or covering of the wire going into the hole 
in the larger end of the terminal. These tips are 
usually made of brass.* The right-hand view 
shows a terminal or binding-post for storage 
battery use, which is heavier and larger than the 
one shown in the left-hand view. The connector 
for use with this terminal is also shown. The 
wire is attached in the same manner as for the 
other connector. 

Testing Ignition Batteries. Get a 4 or 

6-volt, one-ampere incandescent lamp, and after 
cutting the battery out of the charging circuit, 
put the lamp in the battery circuit for a few sec- 
onds only. If the battery is fully charged the 
lamp will give out a brilliant hght. On no 
account use an ammeter to test a storage battery. 
It will injure the battery if kept in the circuit long 
enough to get an accurate reading. 

Throttle Troubles— See Troubles, Throttle. 

Throttle, Use of. A throttle is generally 
placed in the pipe between the carbureter and 
the admission- valve of the motor, to control the 
sj3eed and power of the motor by reducing the 
supply of mixture. It is not by any means an 
efficient method of governing. The inefficiency of 



296 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

the throttle is due to the fact that the efficiency of 
an explosive motor depends on the compres- 
sion. 

If the mixture be throttled so as to get a less 
volume, less compression pressure is the result, 
as with half the volume of mixture there is only 
half the compression pressure, therefore about 
half the efficiency. When running idle or very 
slowly, the saving of noise is worth the difference. 

As it is important to keep up the compression 
pressure, and therefore the efficiency, throttling is 
therefore not an economical form of speed r^u- 
lation — see also ]\Iotors, Speed Regulation of. 

Tires. A single-tube tire differs from a double- 
tube tire in the fact that the inner or air-tube is 
vulcanized to the outer tube. In a double-tube 
tire they are separately attached to the rim of 
the wheel, and are not in contact except when the 
inner tube is inflated. A puncture through the 
tread of a single-tube tire may be repaired by the 
use of rivet-shaped rubber patches, which are 
inserted in the puncture and secured in place with 
cement. With a double-tube tire, the casing must 
be removed from the rim of the wheel, and suit- 
ably sized patches are then cemented upon the 
inner tube according to the nature of the puncture. 
When a {)uncture occurs on the road, the double- 
tube tire may he repaired in a similar manner to 
the single-tube, and when the tire is inflated, the 
air is retained by the inner tube and prevented 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



from leaking through the minut« openings in the 
rubber and fabric of the easing. 

Figure 95 shows cross -sections of single and 
double-tube automobile tires. 

The lower view in Figure 96, shows a form of 
single-tube tire 




er threads which hold the longitudinal threads 
securely under inflation. The spiral windings 
are then pushed along the length of the tube, so 
as to reduce the distance 
between the windings from 
one-quarter of an inch to 
less than one-eighth of an 
inch, with the result that 
the intermediate sections 
of the longitudinal threads 
are pushed up into a 
series of loops, thus form- 
ing stronger attachments for the fabric, when held 
in the rubber wall built up over these layers of 
threads. 

The upper view in Figure 96, shows a method 
of strengthening the fabric of a tire against any 




Fig. 96 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



Fig. 97 



cause that would tend to burst or tear open the 
walls, aiid is a series of plies or layers of thread 
wound on in diagonally opposite directions, each 
layer being of a more open 
coDstruction than the last, 
the closest winding being 
on the inner layer of the 
tire. 

A short section of an 
automobile tjre with a 
tread having circular pro- 
jections is shown in Fig- 
ure 97. It is siud to 
increase the tractive or 
adhesive properties of the tire, and also to reduce 
the danger of skidding or side-slip to a minimum. 
Tire Repairs. A method of repuring a 
puncture in 
single-tube tire 
bymoansof rivet- 
shaped plugs or 
l)at<lies is shown 
ill Figures !)8 and 
!)!). P'igure 98 
shows the man- 
ner of making 
the repair and 
I'igiirc 9!) the pliK-ing of a strap or bandage of 
sticky taiH' anmnil the tire and the rim of the wheel. 
The bandage is usually left on until it wears out. 




THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



299 



The manner of removing the casing of a double- 
tube tire of the clincher type, to make a repair 
to the inner tube, 
is clearly shown 
in Figure 100. 

Tonneaa. The 

name or term 
used in connec- 
tion with the rear 
seats of a motor 
car. Literally 
the word means a round tank or water barrel. 

Tools Necessary on a Car. The following 

tools will not only be found useful, but in many 
cases absolutely necessary on a car: 

Air pump. Monkey wrench. 




Cold chisel. 


Oil can. 


Densimeter. 


Pliers. 


FUes. 


Scissors. 


Hammer. 


Screw-driver. 


Jack. 


Spanners. 


Key puller. 


Tire removers. 


Knife. 


Tire repair kit. 



Torsional Strength of Materials. The tor- 
sional strengths or resistance to distortion by 
twisting in pounds per square inch of different 
materials, are given as follows: 

Bessemer Steel 80,000 

Cast Iron 25,000 

Cold Drawn Steel 80,000 

Cold Rolled Steel 70,000 

Machinery Steel 60,000 

Tool Steel 100,000 

Timber 1,200 to 1,500 

Wrought Iron 45,000 



300 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



Touring Oar. A car with non-removable rear 
seats and a carrying capacity of 5 to 6 persons, 
with from 16 to 24 horsepower, is known as a 
touring car. Such a car generally has a running 
radius of 50 to 75 miles on one charge of gasoline 
and water — see Automobiles, Typical American, 
also Frontispiece. 
Touring Sundries. Extra parts and supphes 

necessary for 
use when on an 
extended tour 
are as follows: 
Extra parts: 
Chain links. 
Batteries, Inner 
tubes. Insulat- 
ed wire, Pack- 
ing. Spark 
plugs. Valves, 
Valve springs. 
Supplies: Acetylene (carbide of calcium). Cyl- 
inder oil, Goggles, Lap robe, Lamp oil. Lubri- 
cating oil, Storm apron, Tire bandage. Waste, 
Whiskey (for emergency use only). 

Traction of Driving Wheels. A horse which 
exerts a pull of about 375 pounds continuously for 
an hour and goes a distance of one mile in au hour 
is working at the rate of one horsepower. If for 
anv reason the horse is unable to exert as much 
as 375 pmnds pull when going at the rate of one 




Fig. 100 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 301 

mile per hour, he is thereby prevented from work- 
ing at the rate of one horsepower. 

The same rule applies to a motor car. When 
the road is not slippery there may occur a condi- 
tion which does not appear with horse traction: 
that the tires fail to adhere to the ground owing 
to insuflScient weight on the driving wheels. In 
such a case it is impossible for the motor-car to 
exert a push of 375 pounds without skidding the 
wheels, and thus it would be impossible for it to 
work at the rate of one horsepower. With under- 
powered motor-cars this difficulty does not occur, 
but to develop 10 horsepower at the rims of the 
driving wheels while covering the ground at the 
rate of one mile per hour, the car must exert a push 
on the road of 3,750 pounds. This is, on touring 
cars of ordinary weight, impossible, because the 
weight on the driving wheels is invariably less 
than 3,750 pounds, while the adhesion with the 
road is only a fraction of the weight on the rear 
wheels. As the speed rises, however, the push 
necessary for the development of 10 horsepower 
goes down until at 10 miles per hour a push of 375 
pounds means 10 horsepower. 

Thus a 40 horsepower car, if it could start work 
with the activity of forty horses, would, while it 
was moving at one mile per hour, exert no less a 
push than 40 x 375, which is equal to 15,700 
pounds. This tremendous push is rendered im- 
possible by the fact that the wheels of a car 



302 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

weighing 2,000 pounds only grip the ground 
enough to exert about 750 pounds push. Beyond 
this point they will skid. 

This shows that a high-powered car, when the 
car is moving slowly, cannot develop its full power 
unless the road wheels are capable of adhering to 
the ground suflSciently to transmit this power. As 
a rule only about 0.6 of the weight of the car is on 
the driving wheels, and of that only 0.625 is avail- 
able for the adhesion (owing to the coefficient of 
friction between rubber and road being 0.625). 
So a 10 horsepower car weighing 2,000 pounds 
cannot exert its full power when the car is starting, 
nor until it is traveling at 5 miles per hour. 

It would be wrong to contend that on all cars 
having the weight distributed as at present, a 60 
horsepower motor is useless, but it is needless to 
say that the output of such a motor is not available 
at starting or at any speed under 30 miles per hour, 
although the whole power is more needed then 
than at any other time. The remedy wliich sug- 
gests itself is liy using all the adhesion of the car, 
that is, to drive with all four wheels. 

Transmission of Power, Efficiency of. The 

efficiencv of various forms of drives between the 
motor and the driving wheels of a motor car may 
be estimated as follows: 

Single-chain, with direct drive on the high 
speed, between the motor and rear axle — 85 per 
cent. 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 303 

Two-chain drive, from motor to speed-change 
gear, from speed-change gear to rear axle — 75 per 
cent. 

Quarter-turn or right-angle drive, with double- 
chain drive to free rear wheels — 70 per cent. 

Longitudinal shaft drive, with universal joints 
and bevel gear in differential case — 65 per 
cent. 

Trembler — See Electrical Ignition, also Vibra- 
tor Coil. 

Troubles — See Battery, Carbureter, Clutch, 
Road and Starting Troubles. 

Troubles with Batteries and Ignition. The 

reason for the troubles experienced with batteries 
and ignition devices on gasohne automobile mo- 
tors is from the high speed at which such motors 
are run and the greater amount of heat developed, 
as compared with stationary or marine gasoline 
motors. 

Troubles, Throttle. Slowing down the speed 
of a motor by throttling the charge, should not 
be resorted to, until the ignition has been retarded 
as far as possible. If the motor speed be reduced, 
by first throttling and then afterwards retarding 
the ignition, or by a combination of the two, 
it generally results in misfiring of the motor. 

A butterfly-valve or form of throttle commonly 
used is shown in Figure 101. The valve-chamber 
A has the valve B operated by the lever C 
The valve is located at any suitable point in the 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



i-pipe D between the carbureter anc 
the admission- valve of the motor. 

A form of admission- valve governor or throttl< 
is shown in Figure 102. The pressure of tht 
spring on the admission- 
valve stem A is increaseti 
or decreased by means d 
the wedge B, acting on 
the taper washer or coUai 
C. The valve is located 
the cylinder-head oi 
combustion chamber D 
of the cylinder B, and is operated by means ol 
the rod F, through the bell-crank lever G and 
link H. The bell-crank lever is carried by a 
bracket /, on the top of the cylinder as shown. 




Fig. 102 




ADMISSION THROTTLE 



Truck, Heavy. For heavy freighting and 
depot work in large cities, electric trucks or wagons 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



305 



seem to predominate, on account of their sim- 
plicity, freedom from vibration and absence of 
noise or odor. The truck illustrated in Figure 
103 has a carrying capacity of 8,000 pounds, with 




speed of 6 to 8 miles per hour, and a running 
radius of 25 to 30 miles on one battery charge. 

Tube-ignition — See Ignition, Hot Tube. 

Two-cycle Motor — See Motor, Two-cycle. 

Universal-joints. The elementary form of a 
universal- joint or flexible coupling consists of a 
spiral spring. Such a form of universal-joint is 
sometimes used to drive a rotary pump or a small 
generator on a car. The rear wheels or axle of a 
car are sometimes driven by means of a longi- 



=ES=: 



306 THE ArTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

tudinal shaft ^ith a quarter-him drive on a coun- 
ter shaft or a bevel gear drive attached to the 
difTcrential gear of the rear axle. In such case> 
some form of universal- joints is necessary to 
allow the rear wheels and axle to accommodate 
themselves to the inequalities of the road surfacr. 
Three forms of universal- joints are shown in 
Figure 104. The upper view in the drawings 
shows the form most generally used on motor-cars, 
for the purposes just described. The one sho^ii 
in the c-enter view will allow a greater amount «^f 
angular distortion than the form shown in the 
upper vi(»w, but is of a more expensive construc- 
tion. Where only a slight amount of angular 
distortion is needed, the construction shown in the 
h)wer figure in the drawing is very suitable, the 
two jaws or knuckles of the j(»nt being flexibly 
attached by means of a plate of spring steel in the 
form of a cross. 

Valves. A valve in a very bad or pitted condi- 
tion causes bad compression and the exhaust- 
valve should be ground occasionally. After 
irrindinc; the exhaust- valve be sure that there 
i< ample deanince between the valve and the 
lifter. It should have not less than one-thirtv- 

m 

soi'ond of an inch, otherwise when the valve be- 
comes hot it will not <<*at properiy, poor com- 
pr^^ssion IviuiX the n^^iilt. In grinding a valve 
thor\^ is uv> vHwisiv^ri tv^ u<o tonv, and the grinding 
should be vlvHio Hirhtlv, tlie valve being lifted from 



THE AtJTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 307 




UNIVERSAL JOINTS 



308 THE AUTOMOIULE HAND-BOOK 

time to time so that any foreign substance in thi 
emery will not cut a ridge in the seat or the valvn 
itself. After grinding the valve always wash ou 
the valve seat with a little kerosene and be carefu 
that none of the emery is allowed to get into th( 
motor cylinder. 

Mp:tiiod of Grinding. Valves which nee< 
reseating should first be ground in place with fini 
emery and oil, then finished with tripoli an< 
water. 

Exhaust-valve Sticking. Sometimes a mo 
I tor may suddenly stop from the failure of ih 

\ exhaust- valve to seat properly. This may be du 

i to the warping of the valve through the jnoto 

I having run dry and become hot, or it may be frou 

I the failure of the valve spring or the sticking of ih 

valve-stem in its guides. The valve should b 

removed, and the stem cleaned and scraped, o 

straightened if it requires it, until it moves freel; 

; in the guide, and the spring is given its full tension 

' If the valve still leaks so that the motor will no 

start or develop sufficient power, the valve wi] 
have to be ground into its seat. 

Auxiliary Air- valve. It has been detei 
mined from the result of experiments that to ge 
the niaxinmm power at any speed from a gasolin 
motor e(iuippcd with a float -feed carbureter, th 
jet of the carbureter nmst have a larger openinj 
for low speeds than for high speeds. As this prac 
tice would recjuirc* a very delicate adjustment i 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 309 

consequently becomes almost impracticable, be- 
cause necessitating a constantly varying regula- 
tion for each fractional variation of speed of the 
motor. The difficulty may be obviated by the 
use of an auxiliary air-valve, located in the 
induction-pipe close to the inlet-valve of the 
motor. 

The jet of the carbureter is set for the maximum 
quantity of gasoline at the slowest speed of the 
motor, and as the speed is increased the auxiliary 
air-valve comes into action and reduces the supply 
of air passing through the carbureter, thereby 
reducing the suction or partial vacuum at this 
point, and maintaining a constant quality of mix- 
ture at all times. 

Valve-stems, Weak Points of. Recent ex- 
periences call attention to the fact that a change 
is necessary in the construction of valves, or 
rather that part of the valve attachments adopted, 
by some designers, to hold the spring in position. 
This remark applies particularly to the vertical 
type of valve, but the same defect has been found 
in horizontal valves. Opinions vary as to the best 
method of securing the springs in position, some 
designers preferring pins, either round or square, 
others the nut and cotter. Both have points in 
their favor and some common faults. It is 
doubtful, however, whether the method of slotting 
or broaching the stem and then using a key for 
securing the spring, is as secure as that of using a 



310 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

nut and pinning it to prevent its becoming loose. 
Under the latter plan there is no drilling of the 
stem except for a small cotter or split-pin and the 
nut carries the strains, whereas in the other method 
the strain bears on the stem at the point at which 
tlie slot is made for the key, the latter being the 
means by which the strain is carried to the stem. 
Especially is the slotting of the stem unsafe when 
the stem is hardened, for vibration plays havoc 
with the valve. Many breakages have occurred 
from this cause and the question has become 
serious. While it is a fact that both kinds have 
suffered, the nut method of fastening is to be pre- 
ferred, from the fact that even though the split 
])in may break and drop out, and the nut become 
loose, the trouble can be temporarily remedied 
by an extra piece of wire, while the slotted stem 
breaks off at a point where the metal is tliinnest 
and makes the valve useless. 

Timing the Valves. The movement of the 
valves should always be timed to give the prop)er 
r(\sults. This is an important point to remember. 
'^riic exhaust- valve cam shaft on a four-cycle motor 
is usually driven by the two to one gear on the 
crank shaft, and if for any reason the gears are 
taken apart and put together, even if only one 
tooth is out of place, it will throw the valve and 
spark mechanism out of time. 

To ascertain if the exhaust-valve of a motor is 
properly timed, turn !l:? flywheel over slowly and 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 311 

notice at what points the exhaust-valve opens and 
closes, and when the ignition takes place. 

The exhaust-valve should open sUghtly before 
the beginning of the inward stroke and close at 
the end of the same stroke. The next inward 
stroke is the compression stroke, when both valves 
should be closed. 

Needle- VALVES. Valves with cone-points and 
having a fine thread on the stem are known as 
needle- valves and are used for the regulation of 
the supply of gasoUne to the carbureter or mixing 
valve of a motor — see Carbureters. 

Butterfly-valves. This form of valve is 
generally used in the admission-pipe between the 
carbureter and the admission-valve of the motor, 
to regulate or throttle the supply of explosive mix- 
ture to the motor — see Throttle. 

Swing Check- valve. Valves with a hinged 
disk, usually set at angle of 45 degrees, are some- 
times attached to the air-inlet opening of the car- 
bureter to prevent leakage of the mixture, when 
atmospheric or suction operated admission-valves 
are used. 

GLOiiE Valves. This form of valve is usually 
placed in the outlet pipe of the gasoline tank, to 
shut off the gasoline from the carbureter. 

Variable-speed Devices — See Friction Drives, 

also Power Transmission Devices. 

Vibrator — See Electrical Ignition, also Induc- 
tion and Vibrator Coils, 



312 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

Vibrator Coil, Current Used with. A prop- 

erly designed vibrator coil will not use as much 
current as a plain jump-spark coil. The self- 
induction in the primary circuit caused by the 
high frequency of the pulsations tends to check 
the flow of the current to a far greater extent in a 
vibrator coil than in a plain jump-spark coil. 
The amount of the retardation of tte current in 
the primary winding of a vibrator coil can be cal- 
culated to a nicety, when the number of pulsations 
of the coil per second are known, but this calcu- 
lation involves the use of logarithms and a knowl- 
edge of higher mathematics. 

Vibrator, Independent — See Electro-magnetic 

Vibrator. 

Voltmeter — See Ammeter. 

Voltmeter, Use of — See Battery Troubles, 
also Storage Batteries. 

Vulcanized Fiber — See Fiber. 

Washers — See Insulating Material. 

Water Circulation. There are two systems of 
water circulation in use for cooUng the cylinders 
of explosive motors: The natural or thermal- 
syphon system and the forced water circula- 
tion. 

In natural or thermal-syphon water circulation 
the fac't that cold water is heavier than hot water 
is taken advantage of. A head of water is ob- 
tained by placing the tank above the level of the 
cylinder water-jacket, and as the water in ^the 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 313 

jacket IS heated by the combustion, the cooler 
water from the tank iBows in, forcing the heated 
water in the tank to take its place, and in this 
manner an automatic circulation of water is set up. 
The pipes must be so arranged that they offer 
every faciUty for the free circulation of the water, 
the cold water leaving through a pipe at the bottom 
of the tank and entering at the lowest point of the 
cyUnder, while the hot water leaves the top of the 
cyUnder and enters the tank at the side near the 
top. The water circulation, though automatic, 
is very slow, and for this reason requires a larger 
body of water to produce as good a cooling effect 
as a forced circulation. 

In forced circulation a rotary pump is used, the 
direction of the flow being such that the water 
passes from the pump to the cylinder, thence to 
the radiator, on to the tank, and then through the 
pump again, thus completing its circuit. The 
water in this way gets the maximum cooling effect 
from the radiator, and the body of water in the 
tank is kept cool. On account of the high speed 
of a gasohne automobile motor, and the compara- 
tively small amount of power required to circulate 
the water, rotary pumps are much used. As there 
are no valves to get out of order, and high speed 
is obtainable, this type of pump is very suitable 
for automobile use. 

The upper and lower views in Diagram No. 8 
show the principles of operation of the gravity or 



314 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



thermal-syphon, and the forced or pump circula- 
ting systems, respectively. 

Water-jackets. The thickness of the water- 
jacket space around the cylinder of an explosive 



i] 




WATER 
TANK 



RADIATOR' 






A 



TANK-RADIATOR 



i 






I 



DIAGRAM 



h4a8 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 315 

motor should not be less than one-eighth of the 
bore of the cyUnder, while the water space sur- 
rounding the head combustion chamber of the 
cylinder should not be less than one-sixth of the 
cyUnder bore. 

Bosses for pipe connections to the water jacket 
outlet should always be placed at the highest 
point of the jacket, so as to prevent an air space 
being formed above the outlet of the jacket. Steam 
will be formed in this space, and with a gravity or 
thermal-syphon system is Uable to blow or force 
the water out of the cyUnder jacket. 

To obtain the greatest degree of fuel economy 
and motor eflSciency the jacket water should be 
always of a temperature sUghtly under the boihng 
point of water. A cool water-jacket is a sign of 
an inefficient motor. 

Water-jacket, Leaks in. A leak in the water- 
jacket of the cylinder of a gasoline motor may 
be due to one of two causes: Either to spongy 
places in the metal of the jacket from imperfect 
foundry work, or to cracks in the jacket from 
allowing the water to stay in the cylinder jacket 
during extremely cold weather and the car not in 
use. The spongy place or crack may be repaired 
by using one of the two following solutions: 
Remove the cylinder from the motor and first 
wash out the inside of the jacket with a 
20 per cent solution of sulphuric acid and water, 
taking care, however, not to let any of the solu- 



316 THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 

tion get on any of the finished parts of the 
cylinder. For a spongy place in the jacket use a 
saturated solution of sal-ammoniac and place the 
cylinder in such a position that the spongy place 
is underneath; allow to stand in this position for 
at least two or three days. Then empty out the 
solution and leave the cylinder standing for two 
or three days more, until the leak has thoroughly 
rusted. For a cracked water-jacket, keep the 
water-jacket full of a saturated solution of sulphate 
of copper (blue vitriol) for at least four days. 
The crack is filled up by what is practically 
an electro-chemical deposit of pure metallic 
copper. 

Water-tanks — See Leakage, also Tanks, Ca- 
pacity of, and Tanks, GasoUne and Water. 

Watt-hour, Definition of. A current of one 
ampere flowing in a closed electric circuit, with 
an electro-motive force of one volt, is equal to one 
volt-ampere or one watt. The voltage of a cir- 
cuit, multiplied by the rate of the current flowing 
in amperes, gives the rate of work, or energy ex- 
pended in watt-hours. 

Weight of Substances — See Substances, 
Weight of— Table No. 24. , 

Wheels, Driving — See Driving Wheels, Large 
versus Small. 

Wheels, Speed of — See Speed of Wheels. 
Wheel-steering Devices — See Steering De- 
vices. ^ 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 317 

Wipe Spark. A form of primary sparking 
device which is in use on some gasoline motor- 
cars, but principally used on marine and station- 
ary gasoline motors, A form of wipe or touch 
spark is illustrated in Figure 105, in which the 
make and break is between a rocker arm located 





^^G Fis- 105 




■ ■ ' " 


*^:^j^v--m 


i- 


w 


n 

PE 


SPARK 


■ 





A — Rocker contact arm. B — Spring-actuated plunger. 
C — Coil spring. D — Insulated bushing. 

E — Hica insulation. F — Lock nut. 

G — Tennitial nut. 

in the side of the combustion chamber and a 
spring plunger immediately above the end of the 
arm, and in the center of the cylinder head. The 
reference table given above in connection with 
the drawing will explain the construction clearly. 
Wire, Copper— See Carrying Capacity of Bare 
and Insulated Copper Wire — ^Tablc No. 26. 



318 



THE AUTOMOBILE HAND-BOOK 



Wire Gauge— See Table No. 26. 

Wire, Platinum— See Platinum. 

Wire, Primary — See Ignition Circuits, ab 
Wiring for Ignition Circuits. 

Wire, Secondary — See Ignition Circuits, als 
Wiring for Ignition Circuits. 

Table No. 26. 

Resistance and Carrying Capacity of Bare 
AND Insulated Copper Wire. 



B. &S. 
Gauge. 


Diameter 
iu inches. 


Ohms per 

thousand 

feet. 


Carrying Capacity in 
Amperes. 


Insulated. 


Bare. 


6 


.162 


0.411 


65 


65 


7 


.144 


0.519 


56 56 


8 


.128 


0.654 


46 46 


9 


.114 


0.824 


39 , 39.2 


10 


.101 


1.040 


32 32.5 


11 


.091 


1.311 


27 


27.8 


12 


.081 


1.653 


23 


24 


13 


.072 


2.084 


19 


19.6 


14 


.064 


2.628 


16 


16.3 


15 


.057 


3.314 


10 


13.9 


16 


.051 


4.179 


8 


12.0 


17 


.045 


5.269 


6 


9.8 


18 


.040 


6.645 


5 


8.1 


19 


.035 


8.617 




7.0 


20 

1 


.032 


10.566 




6.0 



Wiring for Ignition Circuits. Multi-cylind< 

gasoline motors may have the wiring of the 
ignition circuits arranged in various manners, { 
follows : 

Two-cylinder Motor. Single-coil, with th 
two spark plugs in series with each other. A fot 
terminal coil is necessary to use with this arrange 

ment